성경 읽기

개역한글 · 요한계시록 9장

본문 이동

개역한글 · 요한계시록 9장

구약

검색

본문 검색

원어 검색 Strong · lemma · 뜻

버전 범위

본문 범위

설정

보기 옵션

화면 테마

글자 크기

글꼴

원어 보기

원어 검색 열기

주석 보기

이미지

색상 의미

본문의 색상 표시는 주석 제작자가 정의한 해석 흐름입니다.

색상 의미

기본 주석의 색상 정의입니다.

색상 의미 전체 그림

하나님/선

하나님, 성령의 가르침, 진리, 생명, 빛, 율법(계명), 좁은 길, 하나님 나라, 영생 등

하나님으로부터 오는 진리와 생명의 방향성을 의미합니다. 성경에서 하나님, 말씀, 진리, 생명, 빛, 지혜, 하나님 나라 등은 서로 연결된 본질과 방향성을 나타내는 표현들로 설명됩니다. 성경은 이러한 요소들을 단순히 분리된 개념으로만 설명하지 않고, 서로 연결된 하나의 흐름과 방향성으로 표현합니다. 예를 들어: 진리는 생명과 연결되며 빛은 하나님께 속한 길로 표현되고 말씀에 순종하는 것은 하나님 나라에 속한 삶으로 설명됩니다. 따라서 이 색상은 하나님께 속한 진리와 생명의 방향성과 질서를 나타내는 표현들을 포함합니다.

사탄/악

사탄, 더러운 영들의 가르침, 거짓, 사망, 어둠, 불법, 넓은 길, 어둠의 권세, 멸망

하나님을 대적하는 거짓과 사망의 방향성을 의미합니다. 성경은 사탄, 거짓, 미혹, 어둠, 사망, 불법, 세상 권세 등을 단순히 분리된 개념으로만 설명하지 않고, 서로 연결된 하나의 방향성과 본질로 묘사합니다. 인간은 이를 존재, 거짓된 가르침, 속성, 결과, 지배 체계 등으로 구분하여 인식하지만, 성경은 이러한 요소들을 서로 연결된 의미로 표현합니다. 예를 들어: 거짓은 사탄에게 속한 것으로 표현되며 어둠은 사망과 연결되고 불법은 하나님을 대적하는 길로 설명되며 세상 권세는 미혹과 멸망의 체계로 묘사됩니다. 따라서 이 색상은 하나님을 거스르는 방향성과 질서를 따르는 표현들을 포함합니다.

선을 따르는 사람

그리스도인, 순종하는 자들, 하나님의 백성, 알곡, 제자, 의인, 빛의 자녀, 진리를 따르는 자들, 생명의 길을 걷는 자들, 선한 양심 등

본문의 인물이나 공동체를 선을 따르는 사람의 관점에서 해석할 때 사용합니다. 이 색상은 인물 전체에 대한 최종 판정이 아니라, 해당 구절에서 드러나는 방향성이 하나님께 속한 진리, 생명, 빛, 순종의 흐름으로 읽히는 경우를 표시합니다. 같은 인물이라도 다른 문맥에서는 연약함이나 세상성을 드러낼 수 있으므로, 파란색은 영구 신분표가 아니라 본문 단위의 해석 관점입니다. 특히 어떤 구절은 파란색 관점과 녹색 관점이 모두 가능할 수 있으며, 그런 경우에는 청녹색의 양면 관점으로 표시할 수 있습니다.

양면 관점

파란색 관점도 가능, 녹색 관점도 가능, 해석 관점 병존, 선한 방향의 연약함, 세상성이나 육신성의 모습, 문맥상 양면 해석

같은 구절이나 표현을 파란색 관점과 녹색 관점 모두로 해석할 수 있을 때 사용합니다. 이는 의미 자체가 불명확하다는 뜻이 아니라, 본문을 바라보는 관점에 따라 선을 따르는 사람의 연약함으로도, 세상성이나 육신을 따르는 모습으로도 읽힐 수 있음을 나타냅니다. 따라서 청녹색은 별도의 사람 분류나 최종 판정이 아닙니다. 해석자가 실제로 파란색으로 표시할지 녹색으로 표시할지 고민하게 되는 지점, 두 관점이 병존하는 지점을 표시합니다. 예를 들어 믿음의 방향은 선을 향하지만 본문에서는 육신적 연약함이 두드러지는 경우, 또는 한 표현이 선한 양심의 흔들림으로도 세상성의 작용으로도 읽히는 경우에 사용할 수 있습니다.

세상을 따르는 사람

악인, 불순종하는 자들, 세상의 백성, 가라지, 미혹된 자들, 어둠에 속한 자들, 육신을 따르는 자들, 거짓을 따르는 자들, 넓은 길을 걷는 자들, 악한 양심 등

본문의 인물이나 공동체를 세상, 육신, 불순종의 방향을 따르는 관점에서 해석할 때 사용합니다. 이 색상은 인물 전체를 단정하기 위한 표시가 아니라, 해당 구절에서 드러나는 방향성이 거짓, 어둠, 욕망, 불법, 세상 권세의 흐름으로 읽히는 경우를 표시합니다. 같은 인물이나 같은 표현이라도 문맥에 따라 선을 따르는 사람의 연약함으로 읽힐 수도 있고, 세상성을 따르는 모습으로 읽힐 수도 있습니다. 그런 경우에는 녹색으로 확정하기보다 청녹색의 양면 관점으로 표시할 수 있습니다. 따라서 녹색은 파란색의 반대편 관점을 나타내지만, 모든 연약함을 곧바로 악으로 단정하는 색상은 아닙니다.

중립

지명, 시간, 역사적 사건, 일반 명사, 배경 정보, 상황 설명, 기록적 표현, 문맥 연결 요소, 선악 의미를 직접 부여하지 않는 인물/민족 표현 등

선과 악의 축과 직접 관련 없는 중립적 의미를 나타냅니다. 성경에는 선과 악의 방향성을 직접 나타내기보다, 단순한 배경 정보나 역사적 사실, 일반적인 표현 등으로 사용되는 요소들도 존재합니다. 인간은 이를 지명, 시간, 역사적 사건, 일반 명사, 단순 상황 설명 등으로 구분하여 인식하며, 이러한 표현들은 문맥 설명을 위한 역할로 사용됩니다. 또한 문맥상 선과 악의 의미를 직접 부여하지 않는 경우에는, 특정 인물이나 민족을 설명하는 표현도 중립적으로 사용될 수 있습니다. 예를 들어: 특정 지역이나 시대를 설명하는 표현이 사용되기도 하며 선과 악의 의미를 직접 포함하지 않는 일반적인 사물이나 상황이 묘사되기도 하고 단순한 배경 정보나 역사적 흐름을 설명하는 표현으로 사용되기도 합니다. 또한 문맥에 따라 "이방인", "유대인", "로마인" 등의 표현 역시 선악의 의미를 직접 나타내지 않는 경우에는 중립적으로 사용될 수 있습니다. 따라서 이 색상은 선과 악의 방향성을 직접 나타내지 않는 중립적 표현들을 포함합니다.

다섯째 천사가 나팔을 불매 내가 보니 하늘에서 땅에 떨어진 별 하나가 있는데 저가 무저갱의 열쇠를 받았더라

원어

Καὶ

Kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέμπτος

pemptos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3991 원어 검색에서 보기 G3991
Lemma
πέμπτος
Strong
G3991
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
다섯째
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '다섯째의'.

원문 정의 보기

πέμπτος, -η, -ον [in LXX for חֲמִישִׁי and cognate forms ;] fifth: Rev.6:9 9:1 16:10 21:20.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄγγελος

angelos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G32 원어 검색에서 보기 G32
Lemma
ἄγγελος
Strong
G32
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
천사/사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천사, 사자(使者)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ ;] __1. a messenger, one sent: Mat.11:10, Jas.22:25. __2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Luk.1:11, or to execute them, as Mat.4:6. The ἄ. in Rev.1:20-2:1, al., is variously understood as __(1) a messenger or delegate, __(2) a bishop or ruler, __(3) a guardian angel, __(4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, see word; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐσάλπισεν,

esalpisen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4537 원어 검색에서 보기 G4537
Lemma
σαλπίζω
Strong
G4537
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
나팔을 불다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나팔을 불다'.

원문 정의 보기

σαλπίζω [in LXX chiefly for תָּקַע ;] to sound a trumpet: Rev.8:6 ff. Rev.9:1, 13 10:7 11:15; metaphorically, Mat.6:2. Impers., the trumpet sounds: 1Co.15:52.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶδον

eidon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1492 원어 검색에서 보기 G1492
Lemma
εἴδω
Strong
G1492
형태소
V-2AAI-1S
품사
동사
알다/보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보다, 알다, 깨닫다' (완료형 οἶδα '알다').

원문 정의 보기

οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, which see), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] pf. with present meaning (plpf. as impf.; on irregular tense-forms, see App.), to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge of: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.25:13, Mrk.10:19, Jhn.10:4, Rom.7:7, al.; with accusative of person(s), Mat.26:72, Jhn.1:31, Act.3:16, al.; τ. θεόν, 1Th.4:5, Tit.1:16, al.; with accusative and inf., Luk.4:41, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:6, Luk.20:21, Jhn.3:2, Rom.2:2 11:2, al.; before quaest. indir., Mat.26:70, Jhn.9:21, Eph.1:18, al.; with inf., to know how (cl.), Mat.7:11, Luk.11:13, Php.4:12, 1Th.4:4, al.; in unique sense of respect, appreciate: 1Th.5:12 (but see also ICC on 1Th.4:4). SYN.: see: γινώσκω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀστέρα

astera

원어 사전 정의 보기 G792 원어 검색에서 보기 G792
Lemma
ἀστήρ
Strong
G792
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '별'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀστήρ, -έρος, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for כּוֹכָב ;] a star: Mat.2:2, 7-10 :, Mrk.13:25, 1Co.15:41, Rev.6:13 8:10-12 9:1 12:1, 4; metaphorically, ὁ ἀ. ὁ πρωϊνός Rev.2:28 22:16; ἀ. πλαῆται, Ju 13; ἀ. ἑπτά, symbolizing the angels of the seven churches, Rev.1:16, 20 2:1 3:1 (cf. ἄστρον, and see DCG, ii, 674 f.; MM, see word).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐρανοῦ

ouranou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3772 원어 검색에서 보기 G3772
Lemma
οὐρανός
Strong
G3772
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
하늘/천국
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하늘, 천국'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐρανός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for שָׁמַיִם (hence, often pl., οἱ οὐ., see infr.) ;] heaven; __1. of the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky and the aerial regions above the earth: opposite to ἡ γῆ, Heb.1:10, 2Pe.3:5, 10; ὁ οὐ. καὶ ἡ γῆ, i.e. the world, the universe, Mat.5:18, Mrk.13:31, Luk.10:21, Act.4:24, Rev.10:6, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἄκρων οὐ. ἕως ἄ. αὐτῶν (on the absence of art. aft. prep., see Bl, §46, 5), Mat.24:31; ὑπὸ τὸν οὐ., Act.2:5, Col.1:23; ὑψωθῆναι ἕως τοῦ οὐ., figuratively, Mat.11:23, Luk.10:15; σημεῖον ἐκ τοῦ οὐ., Mat.16:1, Mrk.8:11, al.; αἱ νεφέλαι, Mat.24:30, al.; τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐ., Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:32, al.; οἱ ἀστέρες τοῦ οὐ., Rev.6:13, al.; pl. (οἱ) οὐ. (Bl., §32, 5), Mat.3:16, Mrk.1:10, Jhn.1:32, 2Pe.3:7, 13 al. __2. Of the abode of God and other blessed beings: of angels, Mat.24:36, Mrk.12:25, Gal.1:8, Rev.10:1, al.; of Christ glorified, Mrk.16:[19], Luk.24:51, Act.3:21, Rom.10:6, al.; of God, Mat.5:34, Rom.1:18, al.; ὁ Πατὴρ ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐ. (Dalman, Words, 184ff.), Mat.5:16 6:1, al.; θησαυρὸς ἐν οὐ., Mat.6:20, Mrk.10:21, al. __3. By meton., __(a) of the inhabitants of heaven: Rev.18:20 (cf. ib. 12:12, Job.15:15, Isa.44:23); __(b) as an evasive reference to God, characteristic of later Judaism (Dalman, Words, 204ff.): Mat.21:25, Mrk.11:30, Luk.15:18, Jhn.3:27, al.; ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐ. (= τοῦ Θεοῦ); see: βασιλεία). βασιλεία, -ας, ἡ (βασιλεύω), [in LXX chiefly for מַמְלָכָה ,מַלְכוּת ;] __1. prop. abstract, sovereignty, royal power, dominion: Luk.1:33 22:29, Jhn.18:36, Act.1:6, Heb.1:8, 1Co.15:24; λαβεῖν β., Luk.19:12, 15 Rev.17:12; δοῦναι τὴν, ib. 17; ἔχειν β., ib. 18; ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τ. (εἰς τὴν) β., Mat.16:28, Luk.23:42; β. τ. θεοῦ, Rev.12:10. __2. By meton., concrete (MM, Exp., x), __(a) a kingdom, the territory or people over whom the king rules (Est.5:3, al.): Mat.4:8 12:25, 26 24:7, Mrk.3:24 6:23, Luk.4:5, Heb.11:33, al.; __(b) the royal majesty (cf. our phrase His Majesty), the king himself (τ. σπέρμα τῆς β., 4Ki.11:1). __3. In LXX (Wis.6:5, Tob.13:1, al.), Targ. and NT, of the Messianic rule and kingdom, ἡ β. τ. θεοῦ, τ. οὐρανῶν (Heb. מַלְכוּת שָׁמַיִם, Aram. מַלְכוּתָא דִשׁמַיָּא; see Dalman, Words, 91-147; Cremer, 132, 658), the kingdom of God (on the equivalence of the two phrases, see Dalman, op. cit., 93, 218f.); τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 12:28, al.; τ. οὐρανῶν, Mat.3:2 4:17, al.; τ. Χριστοῦ (מַלִכוּת דִמְשִׁיחא, Targ. Jon. on Isa.53:10), Eph.5:5; τ. κυρίου, 2Pe.1:11, Rev.11:15; τ. Δαυείδ, Mrk.11:10; absol., ἡ β., Mat.4:23, Jas.2:5, al. The kingdom is regarded as present: Mat.11:12, Luk.17:21, Rom.14:17, al.; as that which is to be consummated in the future, Mat.6:10, Mrk.9:1, Jhn.3:5, 2Pe.1:11, al. Noteworthy phrases are: ζητεῖν τὴν β., Mat.6:33; δέχεσθαι, Mrk.10:15; κλρονομεῖν, Mat.25:34; διδόναι, Lk 12:32; παραλαμβάνειν, Heb.12:28; αὐτῶν (τοιούτων) εστὶν ἡ β., Mat.5:3, 10 19:14, Mrk.10:14, Luk.18:16; διὰ τὴν β., Mat.19:12; ἕνεκεν τῆς β., Luk.18:29; εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, κηρύσσειν, διαγγέλλειν τὴν β., Luk.4:43 9:2, 60; ἤγγικεν ἡ β., Mat.3:2, Mrk.1:15; κλεῖς τῆς β., Mat.16:10; κλείειν τὴν β., Mat.23:14; υἱοὶ τῆς β., Mat.8:12 13:38 (cf. Cremer, 132, 658). \ (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πεπτωκότα

peptōkota

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4098 원어 검색에서 보기 G4098
Lemma
πίπτω
Strong
G4098
형태소
V-RAP-ASM
품사
동사
넘어지다/엎드리다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '떨어지다, 넘어지다, 엎드리다'.

원문 정의 보기

πίπτω [in LXX chiefly for נָפַל ;] to fall; __1. of descent, to fall, fall down or from: before ἐπί, with accusative loc., Mat.10:29, al.; εἰς, Mat.15:14, al.; ἐς μέσῳ, with genitive, Luk.8:7; παρὰ τ. ὁδόν, Mat.13:4, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5; before ἀπό, Mat.15:27, al.; ἐκ, Mrk.13:25, Luk.10:18, Rev.8:10 9:1. Metaphorical: ὁ ἥλιος, before ἐπί, Rev.7:16; ἀχλὺς κ. σκότος, Act.13:11; ὁ κλῆρος, Act.1:26; ὑπὸ κρίσιν, Jas.5:12. __2. Of prostration, __(a) of persons, to fall prostrate, prostrate oneself: χαμαί Jhn.18:6; before ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.17:6, Act.9:4; id. with genitive, Mrk.9:20; πρὸς τ. πόδας, Act.5:10, Rev.1:17; πεσὼν ἐξέψυξε, Act.5:5; of supplication, homage or worship: πρὸς (παρὰ, ἐπὶ) τ. πὸδας, Mrk.5:22, Luk.8:41, Act.10:25, al.; π. καὶ προσκυνεῖν, Rev.5:14 19:4; ptcp. with προσκυνεῖν, Mat.2:11, al.; ἐνώπιον, Rev.4:10 5:8; ἐπὶ πρόσωπον, Mat.26:39, al.; __(b) of things, to fall, fall down: Mat.21:44, Luk.23:30; of falling to ruin and destruction, Mat.7:25, Act.15:16, Heb.11:30; ἔπεσε (timeless aorist; M, Pr.,134), Rev.18:2. Metaphorical: Rom.11:11; πόθεν πέπτωκας, Rev.2:5; opposite to ἑστόναι, 1Co.10:12; to στήκειν, Rom.14:4; of virtues, 1Co.13:8; of precepts, Luk.16:17. (cf. ἀνα-, ἀντι-, ἀπο-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-, περι-, προσ-, συν-πίπτω.) συν-πίπτω (Rec. συμπ-), [in LXX for נָפַל, etc. ;] to fall together, fall in, etc.: of a house (cf. MM, xxiv), Luk.6:49.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γῆν,

gēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1093 원어 검색에서 보기 G1093
Lemma
γῆ
Strong
G1093
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
땅/세상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '땅, 흙, 지면, 세상'.

원문 정의 보기

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ, [in LXX for אֲדָמָה ,אֶרֶץ, etc. ;] __1. the earth, world: Luk.21:35, Act.1:8, Heb.11:13, Rev.3:10, al.; opposite to οὐρανός, Mat.5:18 11:25, Mrk.13:27, al. __2. land; __(a) opposite to sea or water: Mrk.4:1, Luk.5:3, Jhn.6:21, al.; __(b) as subject to cultivation: Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:8, Luk.13:7, Heb.6:7, al.; __(with) the ground: Mat.10:29, Mrk.8:6, Luk.24:5, Jhn.8:6, al.; __(d) a region, country: Luk.4:25, Rom.9:28, Jas.5:17; γῆ Ἰσραήλ, Mat.2:20, 21; Χαλδαίων, Act.7:4; ἡ Ἰουδαία γῆ, Jhn.3:22; with genitive of person(s), Act.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐδόθη

edothē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-API-3S
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κλεὶς

kleis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2807 원어 검색에서 보기 G2807
Lemma
κλείς
Strong
G2807
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
열쇠
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '열쇠'.

원문 정의 보기

κλείς, -δός Att.. accusative, κλεῖν, later -εῖδα, pl., κλεῖδες, -ας, contr., -εῖς, ἡ, [in LXX for מַפְתֵּחַ, Isa.22:22, al. ;] a key. Fig., τ. βασιλείας τ. οὐρανῶν, Mat.16:19; τ. γνώσεως, Luk.11:52; of David (cf. LXX, l.with), Rev.3:7; τ. θανάτου κ. τ. ᾅδου, Rev.1:18; τ. ἀβύσσαυ, Rev.20:1; τ. φρέατος τῆς ἀ., Rev.9:1.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φρέατος

phreatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5421 원어 검색에서 보기 G5421
Lemma
φρέαρ
Strong
G5421
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
우물/깊은 구덩이
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '우물; 깊은 구덩이, 무저갱'.

원문 정의 보기

φρέαρ, -ατος, τό [in LXX chiefly for בְּאֵר ;] a well: Luk.14:5, Sng.4:11-12; φ. τῆς ἀβύσσου, Rev.9:1-2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀβύσσου,

abussou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G12 원어 검색에서 보기 G12
Lemma
ἄβυσσος
Strong
G12
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
무저갱/심연
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무저갱, 깊음, 심연'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄ-βυσσος, -ον (Ion. βυσσός = βυθός), __1. in cl., boundless, bottomless (e.g. ἄ. πέλαγος, ἄ. πλοῦτος Æsch.). __2. [In LXX (for תְּהוֹם, Gen.1:2, al.; exc. Isa.44:27, Job.41:22 for צוּלָה, מְצוּלָה, Job.36:16 for רַחַב) and] NT, as subst. (MM, VGT, see word), ἡ ἄ. (sc. χώρα), the abyss; __(a) of the sea (Gen.1:2); __(b) of the underworld, as the abode of the dead: Rom.10:7 (a paraphrase of Deu.30:13 LXX); as the abode of demons, Luk.8:31, Rev.9:1, 2, 11, 11:7, 17:8, 20:1, 3 (Cremer, 2). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
저가 무저갱을 여니 그 구멍에서 큰 풀무의 연기 같은 연기가 올라오매 해와 공기가 그 구멍의 연기로 인하여 어두워지며

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤνοιξεν

ēnoixen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G455 원어 검색에서 보기 G455
Lemma
ἀνοίγω
Strong
G455
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
열다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '열다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀν-οίγω (ἀνά, οἴγω = οἴγνυμι) [in LXX chiefly for פָּתַח ;] to open; __1. trans., with accusative; a door or gate, Act.5:19 12:14, Rev.4:1; pass., Act.12:10 16:26-27; metaphorically of opportunity or welcome, Act.14:27, Col.4:3, Rev.3:20; pass., 1Co.16:9, 2Co.2:12, Rev.3:8; absol. (sc. θύραν), Act.5:23 12:16; with dative of person(s), Luk.12:36, Jhn.10:3; metaphorically, Mat.7:7-8 25:11, Luk.11:9-10 13:25, Rev.3:7; θησαυρούς (Sir.43:14), Mat.2:11; τ. μνημεῖα, Mat.27:52; τάφος, Rom.3:13; τ. φρέαρ, Rev.9:2; of heaven, Mat.3:16, Luk.3:21, Act.10:11, Rev.11:19 15:5 19:11; σφραγῖδα, Rev.5:9 6:1 ff. Rev.8:1; βιβλίον, βιβλαρίδιον, Luk.4:17, Rev.5:2-5 10:2, 8 20:12; τ. στόμα, Mat.17:27; id. Hebraistically (Num.22:28, Job.3:1, Isa.50:5, al.), of beginning to speak, Mat.5:2, Act.8:32, 35 10:34 18:14; before εἰς βλαιφημίας, Rev.13:6; ἐν παραβολαῖς (Psa.78:2), Mat.13:35; of recovering speech, Luk.1:64; of the earth opening, Rev.12:16; τ. ὀφθαλμoύς, Act.9:8, 40; id. with genitive of person(s), of restoring sight, Mat.9:30 20:33, Jhn.9:1ff; 10.21, 11:37ff ; metaphorically, Act.26:18; ἀκοάς, with genitive of person(s), of restoring hearing, Mrk.7:35. __2. Intrans. in 2 pf., ἀνέῳγα (M, Pr., 154); heaven, Jhn.1:51; τ. στόμα, before πρός, of speaking freely, 2Co.6:11 (cf. δι-ανοίγω and see MM, VGT, 45).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φρέαρ

phrear

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5421 원어 검색에서 보기 G5421
Lemma
φρέαρ
Strong
G5421
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
우물/깊은 구덩이
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '우물; 깊은 구덩이, 무저갱'.

원문 정의 보기

φρέαρ, -ατος, τό [in LXX chiefly for בְּאֵר ;] a well: Luk.14:5, Sng.4:11-12; φ. τῆς ἀβύσσου, Rev.9:1-2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀβύσσου·

abussou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G12 원어 검색에서 보기 G12
Lemma
ἄβυσσος
Strong
G12
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
무저갱/심연
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무저갱, 깊음, 심연'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄ-βυσσος, -ον (Ion. βυσσός = βυθός), __1. in cl., boundless, bottomless (e.g. ἄ. πέλαγος, ἄ. πλοῦτος Æsch.). __2. [In LXX (for תְּהוֹם, Gen.1:2, al.; exc. Isa.44:27, Job.41:22 for צוּלָה, מְצוּלָה, Job.36:16 for רַחַב) and] NT, as subst. (MM, VGT, see word), ἡ ἄ. (sc. χώρα), the abyss; __(a) of the sea (Gen.1:2); __(b) of the underworld, as the abode of the dead: Rom.10:7 (a paraphrase of Deu.30:13 LXX); as the abode of demons, Luk.8:31, Rev.9:1, 2, 11, 11:7, 17:8, 20:1, 3 (Cremer, 2). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνέβη

anebē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καπνὸς

kapnos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2586 원어 검색에서 보기 G2586
Lemma
καπνός
Strong
G2586
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
연기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연기'.

원문 정의 보기

καπνός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for עָשָׁן ;] smoke: Rev.8:4 9:2-3, 17-18 14:11 15:8 18:9, 18 19:3; ἀτμὶς καπνοῦ, Act.2:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φρέατος

phreatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5421 원어 검색에서 보기 G5421
Lemma
φρέαρ
Strong
G5421
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
우물/깊은 구덩이
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '우물; 깊은 구덩이, 무저갱'.

원문 정의 보기

φρέαρ, -ατος, τό [in LXX chiefly for בְּאֵר ;] a well: Luk.14:5, Sng.4:11-12; φ. τῆς ἀβύσσου, Rev.9:1-2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καπνὸς

kapnos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2586 원어 검색에서 보기 G2586
Lemma
καπνός
Strong
G2586
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
연기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연기'.

원문 정의 보기

καπνός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for עָשָׁן ;] smoke: Rev.8:4 9:2-3, 17-18 14:11 15:8 18:9, 18 19:3; ἀτμὶς καπνοῦ, Act.2:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καμίνου

kaminou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2575 원어 검색에서 보기 G2575
Lemma
κάμινος
Strong
G2575
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
풀무/화덕
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '풀무, 화덕'.

원문 정의 보기

κάμινος, -ου, ἡ [in LXX: Gen.19:28, Exo.19:18, Isa.48:10, al. (כִּבְשָׁן, כּוּר), Dan LXX TH Dan.3:6 ff. (אַתּוּן) ;] a furnace: Mat.13:42, 50, Rev.1:15 9:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεγάλης,

megalēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3173 원어 검색에서 보기 G3173
Lemma
μέγας
Strong
G3173
형태소
A-GSF
품사
형용사
큰/위대한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '큰, 위대한'.

원문 정의 보기

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [in LXX chiefly for גָּדוֹל, also for מַרְבֶּה ,רַב (incl. μείζων), רֹב (μέγιστος) ;] great; __1. of external form, bodily size, measure, extent: λίθος, Mat.2:60; δράκων, Rev.12:3; ἰχθῦς, Jhn.21:11; πόλις, Rev.11:8; μάχαιρα, Rev.6:4, al. __2. Of intensity and degree: δύναμις, Act.4:33; φόβος, Mrk.4:41; ἀγάπη, Jhn.15:13; ἄνεμος, 'ib. 6:18; κραυγή, Act.23:9; φῶς, Mat.4:16; πυρετός, Luk.4:38; θλίψις, Mat.24:21. __3. Of rank; __(a) of persons: θεός (MM, xvi), Tit.2:13; Ἄρτεμις, Act.19:27; compar. (see infr.), Mat.18:1 (cf. Dalman, Words, 113f.); neut. for masc. (Bl., §32, 1), Mat.12:6; __(b) of things: ἁμαρτία, Jhn.19:11; μυστήριον, Eph.5:32; = μεγίστη (see infr., and cf. Field, Notes, 16f.), Mat.22:36; compar. for superl. (M, Pr., 78), 1Co.13:13. __4. __(a) Compar., μείζων: Mat.11:11 23:17, al.; neut. pl., μείζονα, contr. μείζω, Jhn.1:51; double compar., μειζότερος (M, Pr., 236; Bl., §11, 4), III Jo 4; __(b) superl, μέγιστος (Deiss., BS, 365), 2Pe.1:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐσκοτώθη

eskotōthē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4656 원어 검색에서 보기 G4656
Lemma
σκοτόω
Strong
G4656
형태소
V-API-3S
품사
동사
어둡게 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '어둡게 하다; (수동) 어두워지다'.

원문 정의 보기

σκοτόω, -ῶ (σκότος), [in LXX for חָשַׁךְ, קָדַר, שָׁחַר ;] to darken: Rev.9:2 16:10. Metaphorical, of the mind! pass., Eph.4:18 (cf. σκοτίζω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἥλιος

hēlios

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2246 원어 검색에서 보기 G2246
Lemma
ἥλιος
Strong
G2246
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
해/태양
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '해, 태양'.

원문 정의 보기

ἥλιος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for שֶׁמֶשׁ ;] the sun: with art. (El., § 46, 5), Mat.5:45 13:43 17:2 24:29, Mrk.1:32 4:6 13:24 16:2, Luk.4:40, Act.2:20" (LXX) Act.26:13, Eph.4:26, Jas.1:11, Rev.1:16 6:12 8:12 9:2 10:1 12:1 16:8 19:17 21:23; βλέπειν τὸν ἥ., Act.13:11; οὐδὲ μὴ πέσῃ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὁ ἥ., Rev.7:16; without art., Mat.13:6, Luk.21:25 23:45, Act.27:20, 1Co.15:41, Rev.7:2 16:12 22:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀὴρ

aēr

원어 사전 정의 보기 G109 원어 검색에서 보기 G109
Lemma
ἀήρ
Strong
G109
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
공중/공기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '공기, 공중'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀήρ, ἀέρος, ὁ, [in LXX: 2Ki.22:12 (= Psa.17(18):11 שׁחק), Wi .8 ;] in Hom., Hes., the lower air which surrounds the earth, as opposite to the purer αἰθήρ of the higher regions; generally, air (MM, VGT, see word): Act.22:23, 1Th.4:17, Rev.9:2 16:17; of the air as the realm of demons, Eph.2:2; ἀ. δέρειν, of striving to no purpose, 1Co.9:26; εἰς ἀ. λαλεῖν, of speaking without effect, not being understood, 1Co.14:9.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καπνοῦ

kapnou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2586 원어 검색에서 보기 G2586
Lemma
καπνός
Strong
G2586
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
연기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연기'.

원문 정의 보기

καπνός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for עָשָׁן ;] smoke: Rev.8:4 9:2-3, 17-18 14:11 15:8 18:9, 18 19:3; ἀτμὶς καπνοῦ, Act.2:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φρέατος.

phreatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5421 원어 검색에서 보기 G5421
Lemma
φρέαρ
Strong
G5421
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
우물/깊은 구덩이
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '우물; 깊은 구덩이, 무저갱'.

원문 정의 보기

φρέαρ, -ατος, τό [in LXX chiefly for בְּאֵר ;] a well: Luk.14:5, Sng.4:11-12; φ. τῆς ἀβύσσου, Rev.9:1-2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
또 황충이 연기 가운데로부터 땅 위에 나오매 저희가 땅에 있는 전갈의 권세와 같은 권세를 받았더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καπνοῦ

kapnou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2586 원어 검색에서 보기 G2586
Lemma
καπνός
Strong
G2586
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
연기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연기'.

원문 정의 보기

καπνός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for עָשָׁן ;] smoke: Rev.8:4 9:2-3, 17-18 14:11 15:8 18:9, 18 19:3; ἀτμὶς καπνοῦ, Act.2:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξῆλθον

exēlthon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1831 원어 검색에서 보기 G1831
Lemma
ἐξέρχομαι
Strong
G1831
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
나가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나가다, 떠나다, 나오다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐξέρχομαι, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for יצא, also for עלה ,בּוֹא, etc. ;] depon., to go, or come out of: Mat.10:11, Mrk.1:35, Jhn.13:30, al.; with inf., Mat.11:8, Mrk.3:21, Luk.7:25, 26 Act.20:8; id. before ἐπί, Mat.26:55, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:38; ἵνα, Rev.6:2; ἐ. before ἐκ (cl. with genitive loc.), Mrk.5:2, Jhn.4:30, al.; ἔξω, with genitive, Mat.21:17, Mrk.14:68, Act.16:13, Heb.13:13; ἀπό, Mrk.11:12, Luk.9:5, Php.4:15; ἐκεῖθεν, Mat.15:21, Mrk.6:1, Luk.9:4, al.; of demons expelled, before ἐκ (ἀπό), with genitive of person(s), Mrk.1:25, 26 5:8, Luk.4:35, al.; of prisoners released, Mat.5:26, Act.16:40; ptcp., ἐξελθών, with indic., of verb of departure (cf. Dalman, Words, 20f.), Mat.8:32 15:21 24:1, Mrk.16:8, Luk.22:39, Act.12:9, 17 al. Metaphorical, __(a) of persons: 2Co.6:17, 1Jn.2:19; of birth or origin, Mat.2:6 (LXX), Heb.7:5 (cf . Gen.35:11); of escape from danger, ἐκ τ. χειρὸς αὐτῶν, Jhn.10:39; of public appearance, 1Jn.4:1; __(b) of things: Mat.24:27; esp. of utterances, reports, proclamations: φωνή, Rev.16:17 19:5; φήμη, Mat.9:26, Luk.4:14; ἀκοή, Mrk.1:28; λόγος, Jhn.21:23; δόγμα, Luk.2:1 (cf. δι-εξέρχομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκρίδες

akrides

원어 사전 정의 보기 G200 원어 검색에서 보기 G200
Lemma
ἀκρίς
Strong
G200
형태소
N-NPF
품사
명사
메뚜기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '메뚜기'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκρίς, -ίδος, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for אַרְבֶּה, also for חָגָב, etc. ;] a locust: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Rev.9:3, 7.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γῆν,

gēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1093 원어 검색에서 보기 G1093
Lemma
γῆ
Strong
G1093
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
땅/세상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '땅, 흙, 지면, 세상'.

원문 정의 보기

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ, [in LXX for אֲדָמָה ,אֶרֶץ, etc. ;] __1. the earth, world: Luk.21:35, Act.1:8, Heb.11:13, Rev.3:10, al.; opposite to οὐρανός, Mat.5:18 11:25, Mrk.13:27, al. __2. land; __(a) opposite to sea or water: Mrk.4:1, Luk.5:3, Jhn.6:21, al.; __(b) as subject to cultivation: Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:8, Luk.13:7, Heb.6:7, al.; __(with) the ground: Mat.10:29, Mrk.8:6, Luk.24:5, Jhn.8:6, al.; __(d) a region, country: Luk.4:25, Rom.9:28, Jas.5:17; γῆ Ἰσραήλ, Mat.2:20, 21; Χαλδαίων, Act.7:4; ἡ Ἰουδαία γῆ, Jhn.3:22; with genitive of person(s), Act.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐδόθη

edothē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-API-3S
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐταῖς

autais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξουσία,

exousia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1849 원어 검색에서 보기 G1849
Lemma
ἐξουσία
Strong
G1849
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
권세/권위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '권세, 권위, 자유'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐξουσία, -ας, ἡ (ἔξεστι), [in LXX: 4Ki.20:13, Psa.113 (114):2 135 (136)8, 9, Isa.39:2, Jer.28 (51):28 (מֶמְשָׁלָה), frequently in Da for Aram. שָׁלְטָן, etc., Wis.10:14, Sir.9:13, al. ;] __1. prop., liberty or power to act, freedom to exercise the inward force or faculty expressed by δύναμις (which see): 1Co.9:12; ἐ. ἔχειν, 2Th.3:9; id. before inf., Jhn.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5; with genitive obj., Rom.9:21; before ἐπί, with accusative, Rev.22:14; περί, 1Co.7:37. __2. Later (cf. Milligan, Th., 114; MM, Exp., xiv), of the power of right, authority: Mat.21:33, Mrk.11:28, Luk.20:2; of Messianic authority, Mat.9:6, Mrk.2:10, al.; of apostolic authority, 2Co.10:8 13:10; of the authority of government: Mat.8:9 28:18, Ju 25, Rev.12:10, al.; esp. of judicial authority, Luk.20:20, Jhn.19:10, 11. __3. Meton., __(a) jurisdiction: Luk.23:7 (cf. 1Ma.6:11, Isa.39:2); __(b) a ruler or magistrate: Rom.13:1-3; pl., Luk.12:11, Rom.13:1, Tit.3:1; __(with) of supramundane powers (syn. with ἀρχή, δύναμις, θρόνος, κυριότης): 1Co.15:24, Eph.1:21 3:10, Col.2:10, 1Pe.3:22, al. (Cremer. 236). SYN.: see: δύναμις. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχουσιν

echousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξουσίαν

exousian

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1849 원어 검색에서 보기 G1849
Lemma
ἐξουσία
Strong
G1849
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
권세/권위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '권세, 권위, 자유'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐξουσία, -ας, ἡ (ἔξεστι), [in LXX: 4Ki.20:13, Psa.113 (114):2 135 (136)8, 9, Isa.39:2, Jer.28 (51):28 (מֶמְשָׁלָה), frequently in Da for Aram. שָׁלְטָן, etc., Wis.10:14, Sir.9:13, al. ;] __1. prop., liberty or power to act, freedom to exercise the inward force or faculty expressed by δύναμις (which see): 1Co.9:12; ἐ. ἔχειν, 2Th.3:9; id. before inf., Jhn.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5; with genitive obj., Rom.9:21; before ἐπί, with accusative, Rev.22:14; περί, 1Co.7:37. __2. Later (cf. Milligan, Th., 114; MM, Exp., xiv), of the power of right, authority: Mat.21:33, Mrk.11:28, Luk.20:2; of Messianic authority, Mat.9:6, Mrk.2:10, al.; of apostolic authority, 2Co.10:8 13:10; of the authority of government: Mat.8:9 28:18, Ju 25, Rev.12:10, al.; esp. of judicial authority, Luk.20:20, Jhn.19:10, 11. __3. Meton., __(a) jurisdiction: Luk.23:7 (cf. 1Ma.6:11, Isa.39:2); __(b) a ruler or magistrate: Rom.13:1-3; pl., Luk.12:11, Rom.13:1, Tit.3:1; __(with) of supramundane powers (syn. with ἀρχή, δύναμις, θρόνος, κυριότης): 1Co.15:24, Eph.1:21 3:10, Col.2:10, 1Pe.3:22, al. (Cremer. 236). SYN.: see: δύναμις. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σκορπίοι

skorpioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4651 원어 검색에서 보기 G4651
Lemma
σκορπίος
Strong
G4651
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
전갈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '전갈'.

원문 정의 보기

σκορπίος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX for עַקְרָב ;] a scorpion: Luk.10:19 11:12, Rev.9:3, 5 9:10 † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γῆς.

gēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1093 원어 검색에서 보기 G1093
Lemma
γῆ
Strong
G1093
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
땅/세상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '땅, 흙, 지면, 세상'.

원문 정의 보기

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ, [in LXX for אֲדָמָה ,אֶרֶץ, etc. ;] __1. the earth, world: Luk.21:35, Act.1:8, Heb.11:13, Rev.3:10, al.; opposite to οὐρανός, Mat.5:18 11:25, Mrk.13:27, al. __2. land; __(a) opposite to sea or water: Mrk.4:1, Luk.5:3, Jhn.6:21, al.; __(b) as subject to cultivation: Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:8, Luk.13:7, Heb.6:7, al.; __(with) the ground: Mat.10:29, Mrk.8:6, Luk.24:5, Jhn.8:6, al.; __(d) a region, country: Luk.4:25, Rom.9:28, Jas.5:17; γῆ Ἰσραήλ, Mat.2:20, 21; Χαλδαίων, Act.7:4; ἡ Ἰουδαία γῆ, Jhn.3:22; with genitive of person(s), Act.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
저희에게 이르시되 땅의 풀이나 푸른 것이나 각종 수목은 해하지 말고 오직 이마에 하나님의 인 맞지 아니한 사람들만 해하라 하시더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐρρέθη

errethē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2046 원어 검색에서 보기 G2046
Lemma
ἐρῶ
Strong
G2046
형태소
V-API-3S
품사
동사
말할 것이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다' (λέγω의 미래).

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐταῖς

autais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδικήσουσιν

adikēsousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G91 원어 검색에서 보기 G91
Lemma
ἀδικέω
Strong
G91
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
해하다/불의를 행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '해를 끼치다, 불의를 행하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδικέω, -ῶ (ἄδικος), [in LXX for עשׁק, עוה, etc. ;] __1. intrans., to be ἄδικος, do wrong, act wickedly or criminally: Act.25:11, 1Co.6:8, 2Co.7:12, Col.3:25, Rev.22:11; to do hurt, Rev.9:19. __2. Trans. __(a) to do some wrong: ὃ ἠδίκησεν, Col.3:25; to wrong some one, Mat.20:13, Act.7:26, 27 25:10, 2Co.7:2, Gal.4:12, Phm 18, 2Pe.2:13; pass., Act.7:24, 2Co.7:12; mid., 1Co.6:7 (suffer . . . to be wronged; WM, §38, 3; but see Bl., §54, 5; and cf. ἀποστερέω); __(b) to injure, hurt: Luk.10:19 Rev.2:11 6:6 7:2, 3 9:4,10 11:5. † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χόρτον

chorton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5528 원어 검색에서 보기 G5528
Lemma
χόρτος
Strong
G5528
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '풀, 꼴'.

원문 정의 보기

χόρτος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for עֶשֶׂב, also for חָצִיר, etc. ;] __1. an enclosure, a feeding place (Hom.). __2. food, esp. for cattle, grass: Mat.13:26 14:19, Mrk.4:28 6:39, Luk.12:28, Jhn.6:10, 1Co.3:12, Jas.1:10-11, 1Pe.1:24" (LXX), Rev.9:4; χ. χλωρός, Mrk.6:39, Rev.8:7.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γῆς

gēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1093 원어 검색에서 보기 G1093
Lemma
γῆ
Strong
G1093
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
땅/세상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '땅, 흙, 지면, 세상'.

원문 정의 보기

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ, [in LXX for אֲדָמָה ,אֶרֶץ, etc. ;] __1. the earth, world: Luk.21:35, Act.1:8, Heb.11:13, Rev.3:10, al.; opposite to οὐρανός, Mat.5:18 11:25, Mrk.13:27, al. __2. land; __(a) opposite to sea or water: Mrk.4:1, Luk.5:3, Jhn.6:21, al.; __(b) as subject to cultivation: Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:8, Luk.13:7, Heb.6:7, al.; __(with) the ground: Mat.10:29, Mrk.8:6, Luk.24:5, Jhn.8:6, al.; __(d) a region, country: Luk.4:25, Rom.9:28, Jas.5:17; γῆ Ἰσραήλ, Mat.2:20, 21; Χαλδαίων, Act.7:4; ἡ Ἰουδαία γῆ, Jhn.3:22; with genitive of person(s), Act.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδὲ

oude

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3761 원어 검색에서 보기 G3761
Lemma
οὐδέ
Strong
G3761
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다, 또한 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή. __I. As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mat.6:15, Luk.16:31, Rom.4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mat.5:15 10:24, Mrk.4:22, Luk.6:43, 44, Jhn.6:24, Act.2:27, Rom.2:28, al. (see Bl., §77, 10). __II. As adv., not even: Mat.6:29, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:9, 1Co.5:1; οὐδὲ εἷς, Act.4:32, Rom.3:10" (LXX) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πᾶν

pan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χλωρὸν

chlōron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5515 원어 검색에서 보기 G5515
Lemma
χλωρός
Strong
G5515
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
푸른/창백한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '푸른, 풀빛의; 청황색의'.

원문 정의 보기

χλωρός, -ά, -όν (χλόη), [in LXX for יֶרֶק, etc. ;] __(a) pale green: χόρτος, Mrk.6:39, Rev.8:7; πᾶν χ., Rev.9:4; __(b) pale: ἵππος, Rev.6:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδὲ

oude

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3761 원어 검색에서 보기 G3761
Lemma
οὐδέ
Strong
G3761
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다, 또한 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή. __I. As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mat.6:15, Luk.16:31, Rom.4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mat.5:15 10:24, Mrk.4:22, Luk.6:43, 44, Jhn.6:24, Act.2:27, Rom.2:28, al. (see Bl., §77, 10). __II. As adv., not even: Mat.6:29, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:9, 1Co.5:1; οὐδὲ εἷς, Act.4:32, Rom.3:10" (LXX) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πᾶν

pan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δένδρον,

dendron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1186 원어 검색에서 보기 G1186
Lemma
δένδρον
Strong
G1186
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
나무
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '나무'.

원문 정의 보기

δένδρον, -ου, τό [in LXX for עֵץ, etc. ;] a tree: Mat.3:10, al.; δ. ἀγαθόν, Mat.7:17, 18; δ. καλόν, Mat.12:33, Luk.6:43; δ. σαπρόν, Mat.7:17, 18 12:33, Luk.6:43; γίνεσθαι δ., Mat.13:32; γ. εἰς δ., Luk.13:19. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰ

ei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1487 원어 검색에서 보기 G1487
Lemma
εἰ
Strong
G1487
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일/~인지
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사 '만일 ~라면'. 간접의문 '~인지'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰ, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions. __I. Conditional, if; __1. with indic, expressing a general assumption; __(a) pres.: before indic, pres., Mat.11:14, Rom.8:25, al.; before imperat., Mrk.4:23 9:22, Jhn.15:18, 1Co.7:9, al.; before fut. indic., Luk.16:31, Rom.8:11, al.; before pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mat.12:26, Rom.4:14, al.; similarly, before impf., Luk.17:6, Jhn.8:39; before quæst., Mat.6:23, Jhn.5:47 7:23 8:46, 1Pe.2:20; __(b) fut.: Mat.26:33, 1Pe.2:20; __(with) pf.: Jhn.11:12, Rom.6:5, al.; __(d) aor.: Luk.16:11 19:8, Jhn.13:32, 18:23, Rev.20:15, al. __2. Where the assumption is certain = ἐπεί: Mat.12:28, Jhn.7:4, Rom.5:17, al. __3. Of an unfulfilled condition, with indic, impf., aor. or plpf., before ἄν, with imp. or aor. (see: ἄν, I, i). __4. C. indic., after verbs denoting wonder, etc., sometimes, but not always, coupled with an element of doubt: Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13, al. __5. C. indic., as in LXX (Num.14:3o, 1Ki.14:45, al. = Heb. אִם), in oaths, with the formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 627; Burton, §272): Mrk.8:12, Heb.3:11" (LXX) 4:3 (LXX). __6. Rarely (cl.) with optative, to express a merely possible condition: Act.24:19 27:39, 1Co.14:10 15:37, I Pe3:14, 17. __II. Interrogative, if, whether. __1. As in cl., in indir. questions after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc.: with indic. pres., Mat.26:63, Mrk.15:36, Act.19:2, 2Co.13:5, al.; fut., Mrk.3:2, Act.8:22, al.; aor., Mrk.15:44, 1Co.1:16, al.; with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 194), Php.3:12. __2. As in LXX (= Heb. אִם and interrog. הֲ, Gen.17:17, al.; see WM, 639f.; Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions: Mrk.8:23 (Tr., WH, txt.), Luk.13:23, 22:49, Act.19:2, al. __III. With other particles. __1. εἰ ἄρα, εἴγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see: ἄρα, γε. __2. εἰ δὲ καί, but if also: Luk.11:18; but even if, 1Co.4:7, 2Co.4:3 11:16. __3. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, but if otherwise: Mrk.2:21, 22 Jhn.14:2, Rev.2:5, al. __4. εἰ καί, if even, if also, although: Mrk.14:29, Luk.11:8, 1Co.7:21, 2Co.4:16, Php.2:17, al. __5. καὶ εἰ, even if, see: καί __6. εἰ μή, if not, unless, except, but only: Mat.24:22, Mrk.2:26 6:5, Jhn.9:33, 1Co.7:17 (only), Gal.1:19 (cf. ἐὰν μή, 2:16; see Hort., Ja., xvi); ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, pleonastic (Bl., §65, 6), 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __7. εἰ μήν = cl. ἦ μήν (M, Pr., 46), in oaths, surely (Eze.33:27, al.): Heb.6:14. __8. εἴ πως, if haply: Act.27:12, Rom.1:10. __9. εἴτε . . . εἴτε, whether . . . or; Rom.12:6-8, 1Co.3:22 13:8, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπους

anthrōpous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μόνους

monous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3441 원어 검색에서 보기 G3441
Lemma
μόνος
Strong
G3441
형태소
A-APM
품사
형용사
홀로/유일한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '홀로의, 유일한'; 부사로 '오직'.

원문 정의 보기

μόνος, -η, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for לְבַד ;] __1. adj., alone, solitary, forsaken: with verb., Mat.14:23, Mrk.6:47, Luk.9:36, al.; with pron., Mat.18:15, Mrk.9:2, al.; with subst., Mrk.9:8, Luk.4:8, al.; pleonast., οὐκ . . . εἰ μὴ μ., Mat.12:4, Luk.6:4, al.; attrib., only, (ὁ) μ. θεός, Jhn.5:44 17:3, Rom.16:27, 1Ti.1:17, Ju 25. __2. As adv., __(a) neut., (μόνον, alone, only: referring to verb or predic., Mat.9:21, Mrk.5:36, Jas.1:22, al. (see Bl., §44, 2); οὐ (μὴ) μ., Gal.4:18, Jas.1:22; οὐ μ. . . . ἀλλά (Bl, §77, 13.3), Act.19:26, 1Jn.5:6, al.; id. before καί (Bl., §81, 1.2), Rom.5:3 9:10, 2Co.8:19, al.; __(b) κατὰ μόνας, alone (Bl., §44, 1), Mrk.4:10, Luk.9:18. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἵτινες

oitines

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3748 원어 검색에서 보기 G3748
Lemma
ὅστις
Strong
G3748
형태소
R-NPM
품사
-
~하는 자(무릇)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '무릇 ~하는 자/것'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι (also written ὅ, τι and ὅτι; see LS, see word; WH, §411; Tdf., Pr., 111), in NT scarcely ever except in nom. (M, Pr., 91), the only instance of the oblique cases being found in ἕως ὅτου (see: ἕως), relative of indef. reference (related to simple ὅς as Lat. quisquis to qui), whoever, anyone who; __(a) of an indef. person or thing: in general statements, Mat.5:39, 41 13:12, and freq., Luk.14:27, Gal.5:4, al.; in relative sentences, Mat.7:26, Luk.15:7, Php.3:7, al.; πᾶς, with indic., Mat.7:24 10:32; ὅ ἄν (ἐάν), with subjc., Mat.12:50 13:12, Jhn.14:13, 1Co.16:2, Gal.5:10, al.; __(b) of a definite person or thing, indicating quality, "either generic, which, as other like things, or essential, which by its very nature" (Hort on 1Pe.2:11), who is such as: Mat.2:6 7:26, Luk.2:10 7:37, Jhn.8:53, Act.7:53, Rom.6:2, 1Co.3:17, Gal.4:24, Eph.1:23, al.; __(with) where the relative sentence expresses a reason, consequence, etc. (M, Pr., 92), seeing that he (it, they), and he (it, they): Luk.8:3 10:42, Act.10:47 11:28, Php.4:3, al.; __(d) as in Ionic and late Greek (Bl., §50, 1; M, Pr., l.with), differing but little from ὅς: Luk.2:4 9:30, Act.17:10, Rev.12:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχουσιν

echousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σφραγῖδα

sphragida

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4973 원어 검색에서 보기 G4973
Lemma
σφραγίς
Strong
G4973
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
인(印)
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '인장, 봉인'.

원문 정의 보기

σφραγίς, -ῖδος, ἡ [in LXX: Exo.28:11, al. (חוֹתָם) Exo.35:22 (חָח), Sir.17:22, al. ;] __1. a seal, signet: Rev.7:2. __2. The impression of a seal or signet, a seal (on its various purposes, see: σφραγίζω): on a book or roll, Rev.5:1-2, 5 5:9 6:1, 3 6:5, 7 6:9, 12 8:1; metaphorically, Rom.4:11, 1Co.9:2, 2Ti.2:19, Rev.9:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεοῦ

theou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2316 원어 검색에서 보기 G2316
Lemma
θεός
Strong
G2316
형태소
N-GSM-T
품사
명사
하나님/신
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하나님, 신(神)'.

원문 정의 보기

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Act.19:37 only; see M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mat.27:46; cf. Deu.3:24, al.), [in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc. ;] a god or deity, God. __1. In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Act.28:6, 1Co.8:4, 2Th.2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Gal.4:8, al. __2. Of the one true God; __(a) anarthrous: Mat.6:24, Luk.20:38, al.; esp. with prep. (Kühner 3, iii, 605), ἀπὸ θ., Jhn.3:2; ἐκ, Act.5:39, 2Co.5:1, Php.3:9; ὑπό, Rom.13:1; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jhn.1:6; παρὰ θεῷ, 2Th.1:6, 1Pe.2:4; κατὰ θεόν, Rom.8:27, 2Co.7:9, 10; also when in genitive dependent on an anarth. noun (Bl., §46, 6), Mat.27:43, Luk.3:2, Rom.1:17, 1Th.2:13; as pred., Lk 20:38, Jhn.1:1, and when the nature and character rather than the person of God is meant, Act.5:29, Gal.2:6, al. (M, Th., 14); __(b) more freq., with art.: Mat.1:23, Mrk.2:7, al. mult.; with prep., ἀπὸ τ. θ., Luk.1:26; ἐκ, Jhn.8:42, al.; παρὰ τοῦ θ., Jhn.8:40; π. τῷ θ., Rom.9:14; ἐν, Col.3:3; ἐπὶ τῷ θ., Luk.1:47; ἐπὶ τὸν θ., Act.15:19; εἰς τ. θ., Act.24:15; πρὸς τ. θ., Jhn.1:2; with genitive of person(s), Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:26, 27, Luk.20:37, Jhn.20:17, al.; ὁ θ. μου, Rom.1:8, Php 1:3, al.; ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ κ. τ. λ., Rom.15:6, Eph.1:3, Phi 4:20, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Rom.15:5, 13, 33, 2Co.1:3, 1Th.5:23; τὰ τ. θεοῦ, Mat.16:23, Mrk.12:17, 1Co.2:11; τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ., Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; τ. θεῷ, as a superl. (LXX, Jos.3:3), Act.7:20, 2Co.10:4; Hebraistically, of judges (Psa.81(82):6), Jhn.10:34" (LXX), 35. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετώπων

metōpōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3359 원어 검색에서 보기 G3359
Lemma
μέτωπον
Strong
G3359
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
이마
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '이마'.

원문 정의 보기

μέτωπον, -ου, τό (μετά + ὤψ, an eye), [in LXX for מֵצַח ;] the forehead: Rev.7:3 9:4 13:16 14:1, 9 17:5 20:4 22:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν.

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
그러나 그들을 죽이지는 못하게 하시고 다섯 달 동안 괴롭게만 하게 하시는데 그 괴롭게 함은 전갈이 사람을 쏠 때에 괴롭게 함과 같더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐδόθη

edothē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-API-3S
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποκτείνωσιν

apokteinōsin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-AAS-3P
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτούς,

autous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-APM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλ᾽

all᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βασανισθήσονται

basanisthēsontai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G928 원어 검색에서 보기 G928
Lemma
βασανίζω
Strong
G928
형태소
V-FPI-3P
품사
동사
괴롭히다/고통주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '괴롭히다, 고문하다, (파도에) 시달리다'.

원문 정의 보기

βασανίζω (βάσανος), [in LXX: 1Ki.5:3, Sir.4:17, and frequently in Wi, II, 4Mac ;] __1. prop., to rub on the touchstone, put to the test. __2. to examine by torture, hence, generally, to torture, torment, distress: Mat.8:6, 29 14:24, Mrk.5:7 6:48, Luk.8:28, 2Pe.2:8, Rev.9:5 11:10 12:2 14:10 20:10. † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μῆνας

mēnas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3376 원어 검색에서 보기 G3376
Lemma
μήν
Strong
G3376
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
달/월
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '달, 월'.

원문 정의 보기

μήν genitive, μηνός, ὁ, [in LXX very frequently for חֹדֶשׁ, Gen.7:11, al.; a few times for יֶרַח ;] a month: Luk.1:24, 26 1:36, 56 4:25, Act.7:20 18:11 19:8 20:3 28:11, Jas.5:17, Rev.9:5, 10 9:15 11:2 13:5 22:2; pl., of the festival of the new moon (cf. Isa.66:23), Gal.4:10.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέντε,

pente

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4002 원어 검색에서 보기 G4002
Lemma
πέντε
Strong
G4002
형태소
A-NUI
품사
형용사
다섯
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '다섯'.

원문 정의 보기

πέντε indecl., οἱ, αἱ, τά, five: Mat.14:17, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βασανισμὸς

basanismos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G929 원어 검색에서 보기 G929
Lemma
βασανισμός
Strong
G929
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
고통/괴로움
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '고통, 고문, 괴롭힘'.

원문 정의 보기

βασανισμός, -οῦ, ὁ (βασανίζω), [in LXX: 4Ma.9:6 11:2 * ;] torture, torment: Rev.9:5 14:11 18:7, 10, 15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βασανισμὸς

basanismos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G929 원어 검색에서 보기 G929
Lemma
βασανισμός
Strong
G929
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
고통/괴로움
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '고통, 고문, 괴롭힘'.

원문 정의 보기

βασανισμός, -οῦ, ὁ (βασανίζω), [in LXX: 4Ma.9:6 11:2 * ;] torture, torment: Rev.9:5 14:11 18:7, 10, 15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σκορπίου

skorpiou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4651 원어 검색에서 보기 G4651
Lemma
σκορπίος
Strong
G4651
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
전갈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '전갈'.

원문 정의 보기

σκορπίος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX for עַקְרָב ;] a scorpion: Luk.10:19 11:12, Rev.9:3, 5 9:10 † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅταν

hotan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3752 원어 검색에서 보기 G3752
Lemma
ὅταν
Strong
G3752
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~할 때마다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~할 때(마다), ~하면'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅταν (for ὅτ᾽ ἄν = ὅτε ἄν), temporal particle, with a conditional sense, usually of things expected to occur in an indefinite future; __1. prop., whenever; __(a) (a) with subjc. praes.: Mat.6:2, 5 Mrk.14:7, Luk.11:36, Jhn.7:27, Act.23:35, 1Co.3:4, al.; ἕως τ. ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅ., Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25; before τότε, 1Th.5:3; __(b) with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 185): Mat.5:11, Mrk.4:15, Luk.6:22, Jhn.2:10 8:28 (Field, Notes, 94), 10:4, al. __2. As in Hom. (LS, see word), but not in cl. prose, with indic., when (M, Pr., 167f.; Bl., §65, 9): with impf., Mrk.3:11(cf. Gen.38:9, al.); with praes., Mrk.11:25; with fut.. Rev.4:9 (Swete, in l.); with aor., Mrk.11:19, Rev.8:1 (Swete, in ll.; M, Pr., 168, 248; Field, Notes, 35). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παίσῃ

paisē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3817 원어 검색에서 보기 G3817
Lemma
παίω
Strong
G3817
형태소
V-AAS-3S
품사
동사
치다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '치다, 때리다, (전갈이) 쏘다'.

원문 정의 보기

παίω [in LXX chiefly for נָכָה hi. ;] to strike, smite: with the hand or fist, Mat.26:68, Luk.22:64; with a sword, Mrk.14:47, Jhn.18:10; of a reptile, to sting: Rev.9:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπον.¶

anthrōpon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
그 날에는 사람들이 죽기를 구하여도 얻지 못하고 죽고 싶으나 죽음이 저희를 피하리로다

원어

Καὶ

Kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῖς

tais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέραις

hēmerais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2250 원어 검색에서 보기 G2250
Lemma
ἡμέρα
Strong
G2250
형태소
N-DPF
품사
명사
날/하루
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날, 하루, 낮'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם ;] day; __1. as distinct from night: genitive ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Rev.21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ̔ἡ.), Act.9:24, 1Th.2:9, 2Th.3:8, Rev.4:8 (BL, §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Act.26:13; accusative durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Luk.21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Rom.8:36; ἐν ἡμέρα, Jhn.11:9, Rom.13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Luk.2:44; ἡ. γίνεται, Lk 4:42 22:66; κλίνει, Luk.9:12, al.; metaphorically, Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:4, 5 8, 2Pe.1:19. __2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night: Mat.6:34, Mrk.6:21, Luk.13:14, al.; τρίτῃ ἡ., Mat.16:21; ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. (cf. יוֹם בְּיוֹם, Est.3:4), 2Co.4:16; ὅλην τ. ἡ., Rom.8:36 10:21; pl., Jhn.2:12, Act.9:19, al.; ἡ. τῶν ἀζύμων, Act.12:3; τ. σαββάτου, Luk.13:14, 16; ἡ κυριάκη ἡ., Rev.1:10. __3. In Messianic sense, of the last day: ἡ ἡ. (ἐκείνη, τ. κυρίου, etc.), Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, Rom.13:12, 1Co.1:8, 1Th.5:2, 2Th.2:2, 2Pe.3:10, al; by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, ἡ. ἀνθρωπίνη, of a human tribunal, 1Co.4:3 (EV, man's judgment). __4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, §46, 9; M, Pr., 81), of time in general: Jhn.8:56 14:20, 2Co.6:2, Eph.6:13, 2Pe.3:18; pl. Act.15:7, Eph.5:16, Heb.10:32; πᾶσας τὰς ἡ. (cf. כָּל הַיָּמִים, Deu.4:40, al.; MM, Exp., xv), Mat.28:20; ἐλεύσονται ἡ. ὅταν (ὅτε), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35 17:22; αἱ ἡ., with genitive of person(s) (Gen.26:1, al.), Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Act.7:45, 1Pe.3:20; ἀρχ̀ ἡμερῶν, Heb.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκείναις

ekeinais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1565 원어 검색에서 보기 G1565
Lemma
ἐκεῖνος
Strong
G1565
형태소
D-DPF
품사
-
저/그것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '저, 그 사람, 그것'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκεῖνος, -η, -ο (ἐκεῖ), [in LXX chiefly for הַהוּא ,הוּא, and cogn. forms ;] demonstr. pron., that person or thing (ille), implying remoteness as compared with οὗτος (hic); __1. absol., emphatic he, she, it: opposite to οὗτος, Luk.18:14, Jas.4:15; ἡμεῖς, Heb.12:25; ὑμεῖς, Mrk.4:11; ἄλλοι, Jhn.9:9; ἐγώ, Jhn.3:30; to persons named, Mk 16:[10, 13, 20], Jhn.2:21; of one (absent) who is not named, contemptuously (Abbott, JG, §§2385, 2732), Jhn.7:11 9:28; with respect, of Christ, 1Jo.2:6 3:3, al.; referring to a preceding noun, Mrk.16:[10], Jhn.7:45; resumption of a participial subject, Jhn.1:33 9:37 10:1, Rom.14:14, al. (on its reference in Jhn.19:35, see Westc, in l.; Moffatt, Intr., 568; Sanday, Fourth Gospel, 77ff.). __2. As adj., joined, like οὗτος, to a noun with the article: Mat.7:25, Mrk.3:24, Jhn.18:15, al.; esp. of time, past or future: ἐν τ. ἡμέραις ἐ., Mat.3:1, Mrk.1:9, Act.2:18" (LXX), al.; ἐν ἐ. τ. ἡμέρᾳ, esp of the Parousia, Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, 2Th.1:10, 2Ti.1:12; adverbially, ἐκεινής (sc. ὁδοῦ) = cl. ἐκεινῇ (Bl., §36, 13), that way, Luk.19:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητήσουσιν

zētēsousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωποι

anthrōpoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θάνατον

thanaton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2288 원어 검색에서 보기 G2288
Lemma
θάνατος
Strong
G2288
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
죽음/사망
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '죽음, 사망'.

원문 정의 보기

θάνατος, -ου, ὁ (θνήσκω), [in LXX chiefly for מָוֶת ,מוּת, sometimes דֶּבֶר ;] death; __1. of the death of the body, whether natural or violent: Jhn.11:13, Php.2:27, Heb.7:23, al; opposite to ζωή, Rom.8:38, Php.1:20; of the death of Christ, Rom.5:10, Php.3:10, Heb.2:9; ῥυέσθαι (σώζειν) ἐκ θ., 2Co.1:10, Heb.5:7; περίλυπος ἕως θανάτου, Mat.26:38, Mrk.14:34; μέχρι (ἄχρι), Php.2:8, Rev.2:10; πληγὴ θανάτου, a deadly wound. Rev.13:3; ἰδεῖν θάνατον, Luk.2:26, Heb.11:5; γεύεσθαι θανάτου, Mrk.9:1; ἔνοχος θανάτου, Mrk.14:64; θανάτῳ τελευτᾶν ( Exo.21:17, מוּת יוּמָת), Mrk.7:10; death personified, Rom.6:9, 1Co.15:26, Rev.21:4; pl., of deadly perils, 2Co.11:23. __2. Of spiritual death: Jhn.5:24 8:51, Rom.7:10, Jas.1:15, 5:20, 1Jn.3:14 5:16, al.; of eternal death, Rom.1:32 7:5, al.; ὁ θ. ὁ δεύτερος, Rev.2:11 21:8 (cf. Cremer, 283ff.; DB, iii, 114ff.; DCG, i, 791f.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὑρήσουσιν

heurēsousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν·

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπιθυμήσουσιν

epithumēsousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1937 원어 검색에서 보기 G1937
Lemma
ἐπιθυμέω
Strong
G1937
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
사모하다/탐내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '간절히 바라다, 사모하다, 탐내다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπιθυμέω, -ῶ (θυμός), [in LXX chiefly for אָוָה pi., hithp.; also for חָמַד, etc. ;] to set one's heart upon, desire, lust after, covet: absol., Jas.4:2, Rom.7:7 13:9" (LXX), 1Co.10:6 (of. 4Ma.2:6); before κατά (against, in opposition to), Gal.5:17; prop. (as in cl.) with genitive, Act.20:33, 1Ti.3:1; in late Gk. also with accusative (M, Pr., 65), Mat.5:28 (Rec. αὐτῆς; T omits; cf. Exo.20:17, Mic.2:2, Wis.16:3, al.); with inf., Mat.13:17, Luk.15:16 16:21 17:22, 1Pe.1:12, Rev.9:6; with accusative and inf., Heb.6:11; as in Hebrew, ἐπιθυμία ἐπεθύμησα, Luk.22:15.† SYN.: ὀρέγω (cf. Field, Notes, 204), θέλω (DCG. i, 453) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποθανεῖν,

apothanein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G599 원어 검색에서 보기 G599
Lemma
ἀποθνήσκω
Strong
G599
형태소
V-2AAN
품사
동사
죽다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-θνῄσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מוּת ;] to die: of natural death, Mrk.5:35, al.; of violent death (pass. of ἀποκτείνω), esp. of Christ, Mat.26:35, Jhn.12:33, Heb.10:28, al.; of spiritual death, Jhn.6:50, Rom.8:13, al.; with dative ref., Rom.6:2, 10 14:7, 8, Gal.2:19; accusative, ὅ, Rom.6:10; before ἐν, Mat.8:32, Jhn.8:21, 24 1Co.15:22, Heb.11:37, Rev.14:13; before ὑπέρ, περί, Jhn.11:50, 51 18:14, Rom.5:6-8 14:15, 1Co.15:3, 2Co.5:15, 1Th.5:10, 1Pe.3:18; ἀπό, Col.2:20; ἐκ, Rev.8:11; figuratively, 1Co.15:31 (cf. συν-αποθνήσκω, and V. Milligan, NTD, 258f.; DCG, i, 791b; Cremer, 286; MM, see word; on the perfective force of this verb, M, Pr., 112, 114; and on the distinction bet. present and aor., ib. 113 f.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φεύγει

pheugei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5343 원어 검색에서 보기 G5343
Lemma
φεύγω
Strong
G5343
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
도망하다/피하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '도망하다, 피하다'.

원문 정의 보기

φεύγω [in LXX chiefly for נוּס, also for בָּרַח, etc. ;] to flee from or away, take flight: absol., Mat.8:33 26:56, Mrk.5:14 14:50, Luk.8:34, Jhn.10:12, Act.7:29; before εἰς, Mat.2:13 10:23 24:16 (WH, txt.), Mrk.13:14, Luk.21:21, Rev.12:6; ἐπί, with accusative loc., Mat.24:16 (WH, mg.); ἐκ, Act.27:30; ἀπό, with genitive loc. (cl.), Mrk.16:8; id. with genitive of person(s) (as in Heb.), Jhn.10:5, Jas.4:7. Metaphorical: absol., Rev.16:20; with accusative of thing(s), 1Co.6:18, Heb.11:34 (see M, Fr., 116); opposite to διώκειν, 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.2:22; before άπό, with genitive of person(s), Rev.9:6; άπὸ τ. προσώπου, Rev.20:11; with genitive of thing(s), Mat.3:7 (M, Pr., l.with) Mat.23:33, Luk.3:7, 1Co.10:14 (cf. ἀπο-, δια-, ἐκ-, κατα-φεύγω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θάνατος

thanatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2288 원어 검색에서 보기 G2288
Lemma
θάνατος
Strong
G2288
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
죽음/사망
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '죽음, 사망'.

원문 정의 보기

θάνατος, -ου, ὁ (θνήσκω), [in LXX chiefly for מָוֶת ,מוּת, sometimes דֶּבֶר ;] death; __1. of the death of the body, whether natural or violent: Jhn.11:13, Php.2:27, Heb.7:23, al; opposite to ζωή, Rom.8:38, Php.1:20; of the death of Christ, Rom.5:10, Php.3:10, Heb.2:9; ῥυέσθαι (σώζειν) ἐκ θ., 2Co.1:10, Heb.5:7; περίλυπος ἕως θανάτου, Mat.26:38, Mrk.14:34; μέχρι (ἄχρι), Php.2:8, Rev.2:10; πληγὴ θανάτου, a deadly wound. Rev.13:3; ἰδεῖν θάνατον, Luk.2:26, Heb.11:5; γεύεσθαι θανάτου, Mrk.9:1; ἔνοχος θανάτου, Mrk.14:64; θανάτῳ τελευτᾶν ( Exo.21:17, מוּת יוּמָת), Mrk.7:10; death personified, Rom.6:9, 1Co.15:26, Rev.21:4; pl., of deadly perils, 2Co.11:23. __2. Of spiritual death: Jhn.5:24 8:51, Rom.7:10, Jas.1:15, 5:20, 1Jn.3:14 5:16, al.; of eternal death, Rom.1:32 7:5, al.; ὁ θ. ὁ δεύτερος, Rev.2:11 21:8 (cf. Cremer, 283ff.; DB, iii, 114ff.; DCG, i, 791f.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπ᾽

ap᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν.

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
황충들의 모양은 전쟁을 위하여 예비한 말들 같고 그 머리에 금 같은 면류관 비슷한 것을 썼으며 그 얼굴은 사람의 얼굴 같고

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὁμοιώματα

homoiōmata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3667 원어 검색에서 보기 G3667
Lemma
ὁμοίωμα
Strong
G3667
형태소
N-NPN
품사
명사
모양/형상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '모양, 형상, 닮음'.

원문 정의 보기

ὁμοίωμα, -τος, τό (ὁμοιόω), [in LXX for דְּמוּת, תַּבְנִית, תְּמוּנָה, etc. ;] that which is made like something; __(a) concrete, an image, like­ness (Psa.106:20, Eze.1:5, 1Ma.3:48, al.) : Rev.9:7; __(b) abstract, like­ness, resemblance: Rom.5:14 6:5 8:3, Php.2:7; ἐν ὁ. εἰκόνος, Rom.1:23.† SYN.: εἰκών (which see), ὁμοίωσις (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκρίδων

akridōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G200 원어 검색에서 보기 G200
Lemma
ἀκρίς
Strong
G200
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
메뚜기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '메뚜기'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκρίς, -ίδος, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for אַרְבֶּה, also for חָגָב, etc. ;] a locust: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Rev.9:3, 7.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅμοια

homoia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3664 원어 검색에서 보기 G3664
Lemma
ὅμοιος
Strong
G3664
형태소
A-NPN
품사
형용사
같은/비슷한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '같은, 비슷한'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅμοιος, -οία, -οιον [in LXX for כְּמוֹ, etc. ;] like, resembling, such as, the same as: with dative, of form or appearance, Jhn.9:9, Rev.1:13 (WH, mg., R, but see infr.) Rev.1:15 2:18 4:6-7 9:7, 10 (B1., § 37, 62) Rev_9:19; Rev_11:1; Rev_13:2; Rev_13:11; ὁράσει, Rev_4:3; of nature, condition, ability, etc., Mat_22:39, Act_17:29, Gal_5:21, 1Jn_3:2, Rev_13:4; Rev_18:18; Rev_21:11; Rev_21:18; of comparison in parables, Mat_13:31 ff. Mat_20:1, Luk_13:18-19; Luk_13:21; of thinking, acting, etc., Mat_11:16; Mat_13:52, Luk_6:47-49; Luk_7:31-32 (T, with genitive; 131., § 36, 11) Luk_12:36, Joh_8:55, Jud_1:7; with accusative, Rev_1:13 (WH, txt.; Swete, Hort, in l) Rev_14:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵπποις

ippois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2462 원어 검색에서 보기 G2462
Lemma
ἵππος
Strong
G2462
형태소
N-DPM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말(馬)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵππος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for סוּס, sometimes for פָּרָשׁ, רֶכֶב ;] a horse: Jas.3:3, Rev.6:2 ff. Rev.9:7 ff. Rev.14:20 18:13 19:11 ff,† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡτοιμασμένοις

hētoimasmenois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2090 원어 검색에서 보기 G2090
Lemma
ἑτοιμάζω
Strong
G2090
형태소
V-RPP-DPM
품사
동사
준비하다/예비하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '준비하다, 예비하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑτοιμάζω (ἕτοιμος), [in LXX chiefly for כּוּן hi. (Hatch, Essays, 51 a.) ;] to prepare, make ready; __(a) absol., of hospitable preparation: Mrk.14:15, Luk.9:52 12:47 22:9, 12; with inf., Mat.26:17; ἵνα, Mrk.14:12; __(b) with accusative of thing(s): Mat.22:4 26:19, Mrk.14:16, Luk.12:20 17:8 22:8, 13 23:56 24:1, Jhn.14:2-3, Phm 22, Rev.9:7 16:12; before εἰς, 2Ti.2:21; of God's ordaining coming events (Dalman, Words, 128); of blessing, Mat.20:23 25:34, Mrk.10:40, Luk.2:31, 1Co.2:9, Heb.11:16, Rev.12:6; of judgment, Mat.25:41; of preparation for the Messiah, τ. ὁδὸν κυρίου, Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, Luk.1:76 3:4" (LXX) ; __(with) with accusative of person(s): Luk.1:17, Act.23:23, Rev.19:7, before ἵνα, Rev.8:6; εἰς, 2Ti.2:21, Rev.9:7, 15 21:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πόλεμον,

polemon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4171 원어 검색에서 보기 G4171
Lemma
πόλεμος
Strong
G4171
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
전쟁/싸움
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '전쟁, 싸움'.

원문 정의 보기

πόλεμος, -ον, ό [in LXX chiefly for מִלְחָמָה ;] __1. war: Mat.24:6, Mrk.13:7, Luk.14:31 21:9, Heb.11:34; π. ποιεῖν, before μετά, with genitive (cf. πολεμέω), Rev.11:7 12:17 13:7 19:19. __2. = μάχη, a fight, battle: 1Co.14:8, Rev.9:7, 9 12:7 16:14 20:8; hyperb., of private quarrels (cf. πολεμέω), Jas.4:1.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰς

tas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κεφαλὰς

kephalas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2776 원어 검색에서 보기 G2776
Lemma
κεφαλή
Strong
G2776
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
머리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '머리, 우두머리'.

원문 정의 보기

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX nearly always for רֹאשׁ ;] the head: Mat.5:35, Mrk.6:24, Rev.1:14 9:7, al. mult.; figuratively, ἄνθρακες ἐπὶ τὴν κ., Rom.12:20 (LXX); αἷμι, Act.18:6; metaphorically, of a husband, with genitive, 1Co.1:13, Eph.5:23; of Christ, 1Co.11:3, Eph.4:15 5:23, Col.1:18 2:10, 19; of things, κ. γωνίας, Mat.21:42 (LXX) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στέφανοι

stephanoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4735 원어 검색에서 보기 G4735
Lemma
στέφανος
Strong
G4735
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
면류관/관
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '면류관, 화관, 상급'.

원문 정의 보기

στέφανος, -ου, ὁ (στέφω, to encircle), [in LXX chiefly for עֲטָרָה ;] __1. that which surrounds or encompasses (as a wall, a crowd: Hom., al.). __2. a crown, i.e. the wreath, garland or chaplet given as a prize for victory, as a festal ornament, or as a public honour for disting­uished service or personal worth (so to sovereigns, especially on the occasion of a παρουσία, which see; cf. Deiss., LAE, 372 ff.; on its use in LXX for the golden crown of royalty (prop., διάδημα, which see, cf. Hort and Mayor on Jas.1:12): Mat.27:29, Mrk.15:17, Jhn.19:2, 5, 1Co.9:25, Rev.4:4, 10 6:2 9:7 12:1 14:14. Metaphorical: Php.4:1, Rev.3:11; τ. δικαιοσύνης (cf. Deiss., LAE, 312), 2Ti.4:8; τ. δόξης, 1Pe.5:4; καυχήσεως, 1Th.2:19 (see M, Th., in l); τ. ζωῆς (genitive appos.), Jas.1:12, Rev.2:10.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅμοιοι

homoioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3664 원어 검색에서 보기 G3664
Lemma
ὅμοιος
Strong
G3664
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
같은/비슷한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '같은, 비슷한'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅμοιος, -οία, -οιον [in LXX for כְּמוֹ, etc. ;] like, resembling, such as, the same as: with dative, of form or appearance, Jhn.9:9, Rev.1:13 (WH, mg., R, but see infr.) Rev.1:15 2:18 4:6-7 9:7, 10 (B1., § 37, 62) Rev_9:19; Rev_11:1; Rev_13:2; Rev_13:11; ὁράσει, Rev_4:3; of nature, condition, ability, etc., Mat_22:39, Act_17:29, Gal_5:21, 1Jn_3:2, Rev_13:4; Rev_18:18; Rev_21:11; Rev_21:18; of comparison in parables, Mat_13:31 ff. Mat_20:1, Luk_13:18-19; Luk_13:21; of thinking, acting, etc., Mat_11:16; Mat_13:52, Luk_6:47-49; Luk_7:31-32 (T, with genitive; 131., § 36, 11) Luk_12:36, Joh_8:55, Jud_1:7; with accusative, Rev_1:13 (WH, txt.; Swete, Hort, in l) Rev_14:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χρυσῷ,

chrusō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5557 원어 검색에서 보기 G5557
Lemma
χρυσός
Strong
G5557
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '금'.

원문 정의 보기

χρυσός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for זָהָב ;] gold: Mat.2:11, Rev.9:7; of golden ornaments, Mat.23:16-17, 1Ti.2:9 (Rec., WH, mg.), Jas.5:3, Rev.17:4 (Rec., WH, mg.) Rev.18:12, 16 (Rec., WH, mg.); of images, Act.17:29; of gold coin, Mat.10:9.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρόσωπα

prosōpa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4383 원어 검색에서 보기 G4383
Lemma
πρόσωπον
Strong
G4383
형태소
N-NPN
품사
명사
얼굴/면전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '얼굴, 면전, 외모'.

원문 정의 보기

πρόσωπον, -ου, τό (πρός, ὤψ), [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for פָּנִים ;] __1. prop., of persons (so always in cl.); __(a) the face, countenance: Mat.6:16-17, Mrk.14:65, Luk.9:29, 2Co.3:7, Rev.4:7, al.; τὸ π. τῆς γενέτεως (EV, natural face), Jas.1:23; πίπτειν ἐπὶ (τὰ) π., Mat.17:6, Luk.5:12, Rev.7:11, al.; ἀγνοούμενος τῷ π., Gal.1:22; π., οὐ καρδίᾳ, 1Th.2:17; κατὰ πρόσωπον (in front, facing: Thuc., Xen., al.), when present, face to face, Act.25:16, 2Co.10:1 10:7, Gal.2:11; id. with genitive, as compound prep., in the presence of (not cl.; see Bl., § 40, 9; M, Pr., 99 f.; Thackeray, Gr., 43 f.), Luk.2:31, Act.3:13; similarly ἀπὸ π. (Heb. (פָּנִים מִלִּפְּנֵי); see Dalman, Words, 29), from the presence of, Act.3:19 5:41 7:45, 2Th.1:9, Rev.12:14 20:11; πρὸ π. (Heb. (פָּנִים לִפְנֵי), before, Mat.11:10, Mrk.1:2, Luk.7:27" (LXX), al.; in other phrases resembling Heb. idiom (Thackeray, Gr., 42), βλέπειν (ὁρᾶν, θεωρεῖν, ἰδεῖν) τὸ π., to see one's face, i.e. see him in person, Mat.18:10, Act.20:25, 38, 1Th.3:10, Rev.22:4; ἐμφανισθῆναι τῷ π. τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb.9:24; ἐν π. Χριστοῦ, 2Co.2:10 4:6; μετὰ τοῦ π. σου with thy presence, Act.2:28 (LXX); εἰς π. τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν, 2Co.8:24; στηρίζειν τὸ π. (Heb. פָּנִים שׂוּם: Jer.21:10, al.; see Dalman, Words, 30), with inf., to set one's face towards, Luk.9:51; similarly, τὸ π. αὐτοῦ ἦν πορευόμενον (op. cit., 31), Luk.9:53; τὸ π. τοῦ κυρίου ἐπί, 1Pe.3:12 (LXX) __(b) form, person: καυχᾶσθαι. ἐν π. καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ, 2Co.5:12 (cf. 1Ki.16:7); metaphorically, as in Heb. idiom, of judgment according to appearance, external condition or circumstances (פָּנִים H5387; see Dalman, Words, 30; Thackeray, Gr., 43 f.): λαμβάνειν π., Luk.20:21, Gal.2:6; βλέπειν εἰς π., Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14; θαυμάζειν πρόσωπα, Ju 16. __2. Of things (cf. Dalman, l.with) __(a) face, appearance (Psa.104:30): Mat.16:3 (WH, R, mg., om.), Luk.12:56, Jas.1:11 __(b) surface (Gen.2:6): Luk.21:35, Act.17:26 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρόσωπα

prosōpa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4383 원어 검색에서 보기 G4383
Lemma
πρόσωπον
Strong
G4383
형태소
N-NPN
품사
명사
얼굴/면전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '얼굴, 면전, 외모'.

원문 정의 보기

πρόσωπον, -ου, τό (πρός, ὤψ), [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for פָּנִים ;] __1. prop., of persons (so always in cl.); __(a) the face, countenance: Mat.6:16-17, Mrk.14:65, Luk.9:29, 2Co.3:7, Rev.4:7, al.; τὸ π. τῆς γενέτεως (EV, natural face), Jas.1:23; πίπτειν ἐπὶ (τὰ) π., Mat.17:6, Luk.5:12, Rev.7:11, al.; ἀγνοούμενος τῷ π., Gal.1:22; π., οὐ καρδίᾳ, 1Th.2:17; κατὰ πρόσωπον (in front, facing: Thuc., Xen., al.), when present, face to face, Act.25:16, 2Co.10:1 10:7, Gal.2:11; id. with genitive, as compound prep., in the presence of (not cl.; see Bl., § 40, 9; M, Pr., 99 f.; Thackeray, Gr., 43 f.), Luk.2:31, Act.3:13; similarly ἀπὸ π. (Heb. (פָּנִים מִלִּפְּנֵי); see Dalman, Words, 29), from the presence of, Act.3:19 5:41 7:45, 2Th.1:9, Rev.12:14 20:11; πρὸ π. (Heb. (פָּנִים לִפְנֵי), before, Mat.11:10, Mrk.1:2, Luk.7:27" (LXX), al.; in other phrases resembling Heb. idiom (Thackeray, Gr., 42), βλέπειν (ὁρᾶν, θεωρεῖν, ἰδεῖν) τὸ π., to see one's face, i.e. see him in person, Mat.18:10, Act.20:25, 38, 1Th.3:10, Rev.22:4; ἐμφανισθῆναι τῷ π. τοῦ θεοῦ, Heb.9:24; ἐν π. Χριστοῦ, 2Co.2:10 4:6; μετὰ τοῦ π. σου with thy presence, Act.2:28 (LXX); εἰς π. τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν, 2Co.8:24; στηρίζειν τὸ π. (Heb. פָּנִים שׂוּם: Jer.21:10, al.; see Dalman, Words, 30), with inf., to set one's face towards, Luk.9:51; similarly, τὸ π. αὐτοῦ ἦν πορευόμενον (op. cit., 31), Luk.9:53; τὸ π. τοῦ κυρίου ἐπί, 1Pe.3:12 (LXX) __(b) form, person: καυχᾶσθαι. ἐν π. καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ, 2Co.5:12 (cf. 1Ki.16:7); metaphorically, as in Heb. idiom, of judgment according to appearance, external condition or circumstances (פָּנִים H5387; see Dalman, Words, 30; Thackeray, Gr., 43 f.): λαμβάνειν π., Luk.20:21, Gal.2:6; βλέπειν εἰς π., Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14; θαυμάζειν πρόσωπα, Ju 16. __2. Of things (cf. Dalman, l.with) __(a) face, appearance (Psa.104:30): Mat.16:3 (WH, R, mg., om.), Luk.12:56, Jas.1:11 __(b) surface (Gen.2:6): Luk.21:35, Act.17:26 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπων.

anthrōpōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
또 여자의 머리털 같은 머리털이 있고 그 이는 사자의 이 같으며

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶχον

eichon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τρίχας

trichas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2359 원어 검색에서 보기 G2359
Lemma
θρίξ
Strong
G2359
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
털/머리카락
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '털, 머리카락'.

원문 정의 보기

θρίξ, τριχός, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for שֵׂעָר ;] hair; __(a) of the head: Mat.3:4 5:36 10:30, Luk.7:38, 44 12:7 21:18, Jhn.11:2 12:3, Act.27:34, 1Pe.3:3, Rev.1:14; __(b) of animals: Mrk.1:6, Rev.9:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τρίχας

trichas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2359 원어 검색에서 보기 G2359
Lemma
θρίξ
Strong
G2359
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
털/머리카락
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '털, 머리카락'.

원문 정의 보기

θρίξ, τριχός, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for שֵׂעָר ;] hair; __(a) of the head: Mat.3:4 5:36 10:30, Luk.7:38, 44 12:7 21:18, Jhn.11:2 12:3, Act.27:34, 1Pe.3:3, Rev.1:14; __(b) of animals: Mrk.1:6, Rev.9:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γυναικῶν,

gunaikōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1135 원어 검색에서 보기 G1135
Lemma
γυνή
Strong
G1135
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
여자/아내
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '여자, 아내'.

원문 정의 보기

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ, [in LXX for אִשָּׁה ;] __1. a woman, married or unmarried: Mat.11:11 14:21, al.; ὕπανδρος γ., Rom.7:2; γ. χήρα, Luk.4:26; in vocat., γύναι implies neither reproof nor severity, but is used frequently as a term of respect and endearment, Mat.15:28, Jhn.2:4, 4:21 19:26. __2. a wife: Mat.1:20, 1Co.7:3, 4 al.; γ. ἀπολύειν, Mrk.10:2, al.; γ. ἔχειν Mrk.6:18; γ. λαβεῖν, Mrk.12:19; γ. γαμεῖν, Luk.14:20. __3. a deaconess, 1Ti.3:11 (CGT, in l.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὀδόντες

odontes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3599 원어 검색에서 보기 G3599
Lemma
ὀδούς
Strong
G3599
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
이/이빨
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '이, 이빨'.

원문 정의 보기

ὀδούς, -όντος, ὁ [in LXX for שֵׁן ;] a tooth: Mat.5:38, Mrk.9:18, Act.7:54; pl., Rev.9:8, ὁ βρυγμὸς (which see) τ. ὀδόντων, Mat.8:12 13:42, 50 22:13 24:51 25:30, Luk.13:28.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λεόντων

leontōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3023 원어 검색에서 보기 G3023
Lemma
λέων
Strong
G3023
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사자(獅子)'.

원문 정의 보기

λέων, -οντος, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for אֲרִי, אַרְיֵה, also for כְּפִיר, etc. ;] a lion: Heb.11:33, 1Pe.5:8, Rev.4:7 9:8, 17 10:3 13:2; metaphorically, 2Ti.4:17, Rev.5:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἦσαν.

ēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
또 철흉갑 같은 흉갑이 있고 그 날개들의 소리는 병거와 많은 말들이 전장으로 달려 들어가는 소리 같으며

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶχον

eichon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θώρακας

thōrakas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2382 원어 검색에서 보기 G2382
Lemma
θώραξ
Strong
G2382
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
흉배/갑옷
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '흉배, 가슴 보호 갑옷'.

원문 정의 보기

θώραξ, -ακσς, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for שִׁרְיוֹן and cogn. forms ;] a breastplate: Rev.9:9, 17; θ. τ. δικαιοσύνης, Eph.6:14 (cf. Isa.59:17, Wis.5:18-19); θ. πίστεως, 1Th.5:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θώρακας

thōrakas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2382 원어 검색에서 보기 G2382
Lemma
θώραξ
Strong
G2382
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
흉배/갑옷
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '흉배, 가슴 보호 갑옷'.

원문 정의 보기

θώραξ, -ακσς, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for שִׁרְיוֹן and cogn. forms ;] a breastplate: Rev.9:9, 17; θ. τ. δικαιοσύνης, Eph.6:14 (cf. Isa.59:17, Wis.5:18-19); θ. πίστεως, 1Th.5:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σιδηροῦς,

sidērous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4603 원어 검색에서 보기 G4603
Lemma
σιδήρεος
Strong
G4603
형태소
A-APM
품사
형용사
철의/쇠로 된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '철의, 쇠로 만든'.

원문 정의 보기

σιδήρεος, -α, -ον (-οῦς, -ᾶ -οῦν) (σίδηρος), [in LXX chiefly for בַּרְזֶל ;] of iron: Act.12:10, Rev.2:27 9:9 12:5 19:15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φωνὴ

phōnē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5456 원어 검색에서 보기 G5456
Lemma
φωνή
Strong
G5456
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
소리/음성
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소리, 음성'.

원문 정의 보기

φωνή, -ῆς, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for קוֹל ;] a voice; __(a) prop., of persons, Mat.2:18 (LXX), al.; φ. αἴρειν (ἐπαίρειν), Luk.17:13, Act.2:14, al.; φ. μεγάλῃ εἰπεῖν (λέγειν, φωνεῖν, etc.), Luk.8:28, Act.7:57, Rev.5:12, al.; γίνεται (ἔρχεται) φ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν (ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), Mrk.1:11, Luk.3:22, Jhn.12:28, al. (cf. DCG, ii, 810a; Dalman, Words, 204f.); ἀκούειν φωνήν (-ῆς; see: ἀκούω), Act.9:4, 7 al.; φ. βοῶντος, Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, Luk.3:4, Jhn.1:23" (LXX) ; τ. θεοῦ, Jhn.5:37, Heb.3:7, al. By meton., __(α) of the speaker, βλέπειν τὴν φ., Rev.1:12; __(β) speech, language ( Gen.11:1, 4Ma.12:7, al.): 1Co.14:10; __(b) of inanimate things: Mat.24:31, Jhn.3:8, Act.2:6, Rev.1:15b 9:9 14:2, al. (cf. Tr., Syn., §lxxxix). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πτερύγων

pterugōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4420 원어 검색에서 보기 G4420
Lemma
πτέρυξ
Strong
G4420
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
날개
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날개'.

원문 정의 보기

πτέρυξ, -υγος, ἡ (πέτομαι), [in LXX chiefly for כָּנָף ;] a wing: of birds, Mat.23:37, Luk.13:34, Rev.12:14; of creatures seen in a vision, Rev.4:8 9:9.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φωνὴ

phōnē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5456 원어 검색에서 보기 G5456
Lemma
φωνή
Strong
G5456
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
소리/음성
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소리, 음성'.

원문 정의 보기

φωνή, -ῆς, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for קוֹל ;] a voice; __(a) prop., of persons, Mat.2:18 (LXX), al.; φ. αἴρειν (ἐπαίρειν), Luk.17:13, Act.2:14, al.; φ. μεγάλῃ εἰπεῖν (λέγειν, φωνεῖν, etc.), Luk.8:28, Act.7:57, Rev.5:12, al.; γίνεται (ἔρχεται) φ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν (ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), Mrk.1:11, Luk.3:22, Jhn.12:28, al. (cf. DCG, ii, 810a; Dalman, Words, 204f.); ἀκούειν φωνήν (-ῆς; see: ἀκούω), Act.9:4, 7 al.; φ. βοῶντος, Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, Luk.3:4, Jhn.1:23" (LXX) ; τ. θεοῦ, Jhn.5:37, Heb.3:7, al. By meton., __(α) of the speaker, βλέπειν τὴν φ., Rev.1:12; __(β) speech, language ( Gen.11:1, 4Ma.12:7, al.): 1Co.14:10; __(b) of inanimate things: Mat.24:31, Jhn.3:8, Act.2:6, Rev.1:15b 9:9 14:2, al. (cf. Tr., Syn., §lxxxix). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἁρμάτων

harmatōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G716 원어 검색에서 보기 G716
Lemma
ἅρμα
Strong
G716
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
병거/전차
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '병거, 전차, 수레'.

원문 정의 보기

ἅρμα, -τος, τό (ἀραρίσκω, to join), [in LXX רָכַב ;] a chariot: Act.8:28-29, 38, Rev.9:9.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵππων

ippōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2462 원어 검색에서 보기 G2462
Lemma
ἵππος
Strong
G2462
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말(馬)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵππος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for סוּס, sometimes for פָּרָשׁ, רֶכֶב ;] a horse: Jas.3:3, Rev.6:2 ff. Rev.9:7 ff. Rev.14:20 18:13 19:11 ff,† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πολλῶν

pollōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-GPM
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τρεχόντων

trechontōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5143 원어 검색에서 보기 G5143
Lemma
τρέχω
Strong
G5143
형태소
V-PAP-GPM
품사
동사
달리다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '달리다, 뛰다'.

원문 정의 보기

τρέχω [in LXX chiefly for רוּץ ;] to run: Mrk.5:6, Jhn.20:2, 4, 1Co.9:24 9:26; with inf., Mat.28:8; before ἐπί, Luk.24:12 [T [WH] R, mg., om.]; εἰς, Rev.9:9; ptcp., δραμών, with indic., Mat.27:48, Mrk.15:36, Luk.15:20. Metaphorical, from runners in a race, of swiftness or of effort to attain an end: Rom.9:16, Gal.2:2 5:7, Php.2:16; τ. ἀγῶνα (Hdt., Eur., al.), Heb.12:1; ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου (cf. Psa.147:4), ἕως τάχους δραμεῖται ὁ λ. αὐτοῦ), 2Th.3:1 (cf. εἰς-, κατα-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ἐπι-συν-, ὑπο-τρέχω) δράμω, obsol., to run, see: τρέχω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πόλεμον.

polemon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4171 원어 검색에서 보기 G4171
Lemma
πόλεμος
Strong
G4171
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
전쟁/싸움
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '전쟁, 싸움'.

원문 정의 보기

πόλεμος, -ον, ό [in LXX chiefly for מִלְחָמָה ;] __1. war: Mat.24:6, Mrk.13:7, Luk.14:31 21:9, Heb.11:34; π. ποιεῖν, before μετά, with genitive (cf. πολεμέω), Rev.11:7 12:17 13:7 19:19. __2. = μάχη, a fight, battle: 1Co.14:8, Rev.9:7, 9 12:7 16:14 20:8; hyperb., of private quarrels (cf. πολεμέω), Jas.4:1.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
또 전갈과 같은 꼬리와 쏘는 살이 있어 그 꼬리에는 다섯 달 동안 사람들을 해하는 권세가 있더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχουσιν

echousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐρὰς

ouras

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3769 원어 검색에서 보기 G3769
Lemma
οὐρά
Strong
G3769
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
꼬리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '꼬리'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐρά, -ᾶς, ἡ [in LXX for זָנָב ;] a tail: Rev.9:10, 19 12:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὁμοίας

homoias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3664 원어 검색에서 보기 G3664
Lemma
ὅμοιος
Strong
G3664
형태소
A-APF
품사
형용사
같은/비슷한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '같은, 비슷한'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅμοιος, -οία, -οιον [in LXX for כְּמוֹ, etc. ;] like, resembling, such as, the same as: with dative, of form or appearance, Jhn.9:9, Rev.1:13 (WH, mg., R, but see infr.) Rev.1:15 2:18 4:6-7 9:7, 10 (B1., § 37, 62) Rev_9:19; Rev_11:1; Rev_13:2; Rev_13:11; ὁράσει, Rev_4:3; of nature, condition, ability, etc., Mat_22:39, Act_17:29, Gal_5:21, 1Jn_3:2, Rev_13:4; Rev_18:18; Rev_21:11; Rev_21:18; of comparison in parables, Mat_13:31 ff. Mat_20:1, Luk_13:18-19; Luk_13:21; of thinking, acting, etc., Mat_11:16; Mat_13:52, Luk_6:47-49; Luk_7:31-32 (T, with genitive; 131., § 36, 11) Luk_12:36, Joh_8:55, Jud_1:7; with accusative, Rev_1:13 (WH, txt.; Swete, Hort, in l) Rev_14:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σκορπίοις

skorpiois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4651 원어 검색에서 보기 G4651
Lemma
σκορπίος
Strong
G4651
형태소
N-DPM
품사
명사
전갈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '전갈'.

원문 정의 보기

σκορπίος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX for עַקְרָב ;] a scorpion: Luk.10:19 11:12, Rev.9:3, 5 9:10 † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κέντρα

kentra

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2759 원어 검색에서 보기 G2759
Lemma
κέντρον
Strong
G2759
형태소
N-APN
품사
명사
쏘는 것/가시
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '쏘는 것, 가시; 채찍'.

원문 정의 보기

κέντρον, -ου, τό (εκντέω, to prick), [in LXX: Pro.26:3 (מֶתֶג), Hos.13:14 (קֹטֶב), Hos.5:12, Sir.38:25, 4Ma.14:19 * ;] __1. a sting (4Mac, l.with): Rev.9:10. Metaphorical (as Hos.13:14): τ. θανάτου, 1Co.15:55 (LXX), 1Co.15:56, __2. a goad: pl., Act.26:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἦν,

ēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῖς

tais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐραῖς

ourais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3769 원어 검색에서 보기 G3769
Lemma
οὐρά
Strong
G3769
형태소
N-DPF
품사
명사
꼬리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '꼬리'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐρά, -ᾶς, ἡ [in LXX for זָנָב ;] a tail: Rev.9:10, 19 12:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξουσία

exousia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1849 원어 검색에서 보기 G1849
Lemma
ἐξουσία
Strong
G1849
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
권세/권위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '권세, 권위, 자유'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐξουσία, -ας, ἡ (ἔξεστι), [in LXX: 4Ki.20:13, Psa.113 (114):2 135 (136)8, 9, Isa.39:2, Jer.28 (51):28 (מֶמְשָׁלָה), frequently in Da for Aram. שָׁלְטָן, etc., Wis.10:14, Sir.9:13, al. ;] __1. prop., liberty or power to act, freedom to exercise the inward force or faculty expressed by δύναμις (which see): 1Co.9:12; ἐ. ἔχειν, 2Th.3:9; id. before inf., Jhn.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5; with genitive obj., Rom.9:21; before ἐπί, with accusative, Rev.22:14; περί, 1Co.7:37. __2. Later (cf. Milligan, Th., 114; MM, Exp., xiv), of the power of right, authority: Mat.21:33, Mrk.11:28, Luk.20:2; of Messianic authority, Mat.9:6, Mrk.2:10, al.; of apostolic authority, 2Co.10:8 13:10; of the authority of government: Mat.8:9 28:18, Ju 25, Rev.12:10, al.; esp. of judicial authority, Luk.20:20, Jhn.19:10, 11. __3. Meton., __(a) jurisdiction: Luk.23:7 (cf. 1Ma.6:11, Isa.39:2); __(b) a ruler or magistrate: Rom.13:1-3; pl., Luk.12:11, Rom.13:1, Tit.3:1; __(with) of supramundane powers (syn. with ἀρχή, δύναμις, θρόνος, κυριότης): 1Co.15:24, Eph.1:21 3:10, Col.2:10, 1Pe.3:22, al. (Cremer. 236). SYN.: see: δύναμις. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχουσιν

echousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδικῆσαι

adikēsai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G91 원어 검색에서 보기 G91
Lemma
ἀδικέω
Strong
G91
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
해하다/불의를 행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '해를 끼치다, 불의를 행하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδικέω, -ῶ (ἄδικος), [in LXX for עשׁק, עוה, etc. ;] __1. intrans., to be ἄδικος, do wrong, act wickedly or criminally: Act.25:11, 1Co.6:8, 2Co.7:12, Col.3:25, Rev.22:11; to do hurt, Rev.9:19. __2. Trans. __(a) to do some wrong: ὃ ἠδίκησεν, Col.3:25; to wrong some one, Mat.20:13, Act.7:26, 27 25:10, 2Co.7:2, Gal.4:12, Phm 18, 2Pe.2:13; pass., Act.7:24, 2Co.7:12; mid., 1Co.6:7 (suffer . . . to be wronged; WM, §38, 3; but see Bl., §54, 5; and cf. ἀποστερέω); __(b) to injure, hurt: Luk.10:19 Rev.2:11 6:6 7:2, 3 9:4,10 11:5. † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπους

anthrōpous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μῆνας

mēnas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3376 원어 검색에서 보기 G3376
Lemma
μήν
Strong
G3376
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
달/월
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '달, 월'.

원문 정의 보기

μήν genitive, μηνός, ὁ, [in LXX very frequently for חֹדֶשׁ, Gen.7:11, al.; a few times for יֶרַח ;] a month: Luk.1:24, 26 1:36, 56 4:25, Act.7:20 18:11 19:8 20:3 28:11, Jas.5:17, Rev.9:5, 10 9:15 11:2 13:5 22:2; pl., of the festival of the new moon (cf. Isa.66:23), Gal.4:10.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέντε.

pente

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4002 원어 검색에서 보기 G4002
Lemma
πέντε
Strong
G4002
형태소
A-NUI
품사
형용사
다섯
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '다섯'.

원문 정의 보기

πέντε indecl., οἱ, αἱ, τά, five: Mat.14:17, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
저희에게 임금이 있으니 무저갱의 사자라 히브리 음으로 이름은 아바돈이요 헬라 음으로 이름은 아볼루온이더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχουσιν

echousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπ᾽

ep᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βασιλέα

basilea

원어 사전 정의 보기 G935 원어 검색에서 보기 G935
Lemma
βασιλεύς
Strong
G935
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '왕, 임금'.

원문 정의 보기

βασιλεύς, -έως, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מֶלֶךְ ;] a king: Mat.1:6 2:1; used by courtesy of Herod the Tetrarch, Mat.14:9; of the Roman Emperor, as frequently in κοινή (Deiss., LAE, p. 367), 1Pe.2:13, 17; of the Christ, in the phrase ὁ β. τ. Ἰουδαίων, Mat.2:2, al.; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mrk.15:32, Jhn.1:50 12:13; of God, Mat.5:35, 1Ti.1:17, Rev.15:3; β. βασιλέων, Rev.17:14 19:16; β. τ. βασιλευόντων, 1Ti.6:15 (on the associations of the word to Jewish Hellenists, see Cl. Rev., i, 7).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄγγελον

angelon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G32 원어 검색에서 보기 G32
Lemma
ἄγγελος
Strong
G32
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
천사/사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천사, 사자(使者)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ ;] __1. a messenger, one sent: Mat.11:10, Jas.22:25. __2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Luk.1:11, or to execute them, as Mat.4:6. The ἄ. in Rev.1:20-2:1, al., is variously understood as __(1) a messenger or delegate, __(2) a bishop or ruler, __(3) a guardian angel, __(4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, see word; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀβύσσου·

abussou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G12 원어 검색에서 보기 G12
Lemma
ἄβυσσος
Strong
G12
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
무저갱/심연
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무저갱, 깊음, 심연'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄ-βυσσος, -ον (Ion. βυσσός = βυθός), __1. in cl., boundless, bottomless (e.g. ἄ. πέλαγος, ἄ. πλοῦτος Æsch.). __2. [In LXX (for תְּהוֹם, Gen.1:2, al.; exc. Isa.44:27, Job.41:22 for צוּלָה, מְצוּלָה, Job.36:16 for רַחַב) and] NT, as subst. (MM, VGT, see word), ἡ ἄ. (sc. χώρα), the abyss; __(a) of the sea (Gen.1:2); __(b) of the underworld, as the abode of the dead: Rom.10:7 (a paraphrase of Deu.30:13 LXX); as the abode of demons, Luk.8:31, Rev.9:1, 2, 11, 11:7, 17:8, 20:1, 3 (Cremer, 2). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄνομα

onoma

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3686 원어 검색에서 보기 G3686
Lemma
ὄνομα
Strong
G3686
형태소
N-NSN
품사
명사
이름
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '이름, 명성'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄνομα, -τος, τό, [in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם ;] __1. in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mat.10:2, Mrk.3:16, Luk.1:63, Jhn.18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (BL, §30, 3), Mrk.14:32, Luk.1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ, Luk.1:5, Jhn.1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, before nom. prop., Mat.27:32, Mrk.5:22, Luk.1:5, Act.5:1, al.; accusative absol. (Bl., §34, 7), τοὔνομα (= τ. ὄνομα), Mat.27:57; ὄ. μοι (sc. ἐστίν; cf. Hom., Od., ix, 366), Mrk.5:9 (cf. Luk.8:30); ἔξειν ὄ., Rev.9:11; καλεῖν (ἐπιτιθέναι) ὄ. (Bl., §33, 1), Mat.1:21, Mrk.3:16; τ. ὄ. ἐν (τ.) βίβλῳ ζωῆς (cf. Deiss., LAE, 121), Php.4:3, Rev.13:8, cf. Luk.10:20 (ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς); ὄ. βλασφημίας, Rev.13:1; the name as opposite to the reality, Rev.3:1 (cf. Hdt., vii, 138); as a title: Eph.1:21, Php.2:9, 10 (Lft., in l.). __2. By a usage similar to that with ref. to Heb. שֵׁם (Lft., Notes, 106f.), but also common in Hellenistic (M, Pr., 100; Bl., §39, 4; Deiss, BS, 146f., 196f.; LAE, 123:4, of all that the name implies, of rank, authority, character, etc.: of acting on one's authority or in his behalf, ἐν (εἰς) ὄ., with genitive of person(s) (see reff. supr.), Mat.10:41 21:9 28:19, Mrk.11:9, Luk.13:35, Jhn.5:43, Act.8:16, 1Co.1:13; of the name Christian, 1Pe.4:16; esp. of the name of God as expressing the divine attributes: ἁγιάζειν (ἅγιον) τὸ ὄ. (τ. Πατρός, Κυρίου), Mat.6:9, Luk.1:49 11:2; ψάλλειν (ὁμολογεῖν) τῷ ὀ., Rom.15:9, Heb.13:15; δοξάζειν (φανεροῦν, φοβεῖσθαι) τὸ ὄ., Jhn.12:28 17:6, 26 Rev.11:18 15:4; βλασφημεῖν, Rom.2:24, 1Ti.6:1, Rev.13:6; similarly, of the name of Christ: τ. καλὂν ὄ. (Deiss., LAE, 276); πιστεύειν τῷ ὀ., 1Jn.3:23; π. εἰς τ. ὄ. (Bl., §39, 4), Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18; ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄ., 2Ti.2:19; κρατεῖν, Rev.2:13; οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, Rev.3:8; ἐν τ. ὀ. (see reff. supr.), Mrk.9:38 16:[17], Luk.10:17, Jhn.14:13 16:23, 24 20:31, Act.3:6 4:12, Eph.5:20, 1Pe.4:14, al.; εἰς τ. ὄ. συνάγεσθαι, Mat.18:20; ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀ., Mat.19:29; διὰ τὸ ὄ., Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, al.; διὰ τοῦ ὀ., 1Co.1:10; ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀ., Act.9:16, Rom.1:5, al.; id. absol., Act.5:41, 3Jo.7; πρὸς τὸ ὄ., Act.26:9. __3. cause, ground, reason (in cl., usually in bad sense, pretext): Mrk.9:41 (Swete, in l.; Dalman, Words, 305f.). __4. In late Greek (Deiss., BS., 196f.), an individual, a person: Act.1:15, Rev.3:4 11:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἑβραϊστὶ

Hebraisti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1447 원어 검색에서 보기 G1447
Lemma
Ἑβραϊστί
Strong
G1447
형태소
ADV-T
품사
-
히브리어로
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '히브리어(아람어)로'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἑβραϊστί (WH, Ἐβ-), adv., [in LXX: Si prol. 13 * ;] in Hebrew: Rev.9:11; elsewhere, in Aramaic (see supr.): Jhn.5:2 19:13, 17, 20 20:16, Rev.16:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἀβαδδών,

Abaddōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3 원어 검색에서 보기 G3
Lemma
Ἀβαδδών
Strong
G3
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
아바돈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '아바돈(파괴자, 무저갱의 사자)'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἀβαδδών (Heb. אֲבַדּוֹן, destruction; LXX, ἀπώλεια, only in Wisdom Lit., of the place of the ruined dead: Job.26:6, 28:22, 31:12, Psa.88:12, Pro.15:11*), indecl.; in NT, Abaddon, the angel of the Abyss: Rev.9:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἑλληνικῇ

Hellēnikēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1673 원어 검색에서 보기 G1673
Lemma
Ἑλληνικός=Ἑλληνικός
Strong
G1673
형태소
A-DSF-LG
품사
형용사
헬라의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '헬라의, 그리스의'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἑλληνικκός, -ή, -όν [in LXX: Jer.46:6 50:16 (יָנָה: aliter in Heb.), 2Ma.4:10 2Mac 4:15 2Mac 6:9 2Mac 11:24 2Mac 13:2, 4Ma.8:8 * ;] Greek: τ. Ἑλληνικῇ (sc. γλωσσῇ), Rev.9:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄνομα

onoma

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3686 원어 검색에서 보기 G3686
Lemma
ὄνομα
Strong
G3686
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
이름
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '이름, 명성'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄνομα, -τος, τό, [in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם ;] __1. in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mat.10:2, Mrk.3:16, Luk.1:63, Jhn.18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (BL, §30, 3), Mrk.14:32, Luk.1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ, Luk.1:5, Jhn.1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, before nom. prop., Mat.27:32, Mrk.5:22, Luk.1:5, Act.5:1, al.; accusative absol. (Bl., §34, 7), τοὔνομα (= τ. ὄνομα), Mat.27:57; ὄ. μοι (sc. ἐστίν; cf. Hom., Od., ix, 366), Mrk.5:9 (cf. Luk.8:30); ἔξειν ὄ., Rev.9:11; καλεῖν (ἐπιτιθέναι) ὄ. (Bl., §33, 1), Mat.1:21, Mrk.3:16; τ. ὄ. ἐν (τ.) βίβλῳ ζωῆς (cf. Deiss., LAE, 121), Php.4:3, Rev.13:8, cf. Luk.10:20 (ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς); ὄ. βλασφημίας, Rev.13:1; the name as opposite to the reality, Rev.3:1 (cf. Hdt., vii, 138); as a title: Eph.1:21, Php.2:9, 10 (Lft., in l.). __2. By a usage similar to that with ref. to Heb. שֵׁם (Lft., Notes, 106f.), but also common in Hellenistic (M, Pr., 100; Bl., §39, 4; Deiss, BS, 146f., 196f.; LAE, 123:4, of all that the name implies, of rank, authority, character, etc.: of acting on one's authority or in his behalf, ἐν (εἰς) ὄ., with genitive of person(s) (see reff. supr.), Mat.10:41 21:9 28:19, Mrk.11:9, Luk.13:35, Jhn.5:43, Act.8:16, 1Co.1:13; of the name Christian, 1Pe.4:16; esp. of the name of God as expressing the divine attributes: ἁγιάζειν (ἅγιον) τὸ ὄ. (τ. Πατρός, Κυρίου), Mat.6:9, Luk.1:49 11:2; ψάλλειν (ὁμολογεῖν) τῷ ὀ., Rom.15:9, Heb.13:15; δοξάζειν (φανεροῦν, φοβεῖσθαι) τὸ ὄ., Jhn.12:28 17:6, 26 Rev.11:18 15:4; βλασφημεῖν, Rom.2:24, 1Ti.6:1, Rev.13:6; similarly, of the name of Christ: τ. καλὂν ὄ. (Deiss., LAE, 276); πιστεύειν τῷ ὀ., 1Jn.3:23; π. εἰς τ. ὄ. (Bl., §39, 4), Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18; ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄ., 2Ti.2:19; κρατεῖν, Rev.2:13; οὐκ ἀρνεῖσθαι, Rev.3:8; ἐν τ. ὀ. (see reff. supr.), Mrk.9:38 16:[17], Luk.10:17, Jhn.14:13 16:23, 24 20:31, Act.3:6 4:12, Eph.5:20, 1Pe.4:14, al.; εἰς τ. ὄ. συνάγεσθαι, Mat.18:20; ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀ., Mat.19:29; διὰ τὸ ὄ., Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, al.; διὰ τοῦ ὀ., 1Co.1:10; ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀ., Act.9:16, Rom.1:5, al.; id. absol., Act.5:41, 3Jo.7; πρὸς τὸ ὄ., Act.26:9. __3. cause, ground, reason (in cl., usually in bad sense, pretext): Mrk.9:41 (Swete, in l.; Dalman, Words, 305f.). __4. In late Greek (Deiss., BS., 196f.), an individual, a person: Act.1:15, Rev.3:4 11:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχει

echei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἀπολλύων.

Apolluōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G623 원어 검색에서 보기 G623
Lemma
Ἀπολλύων
Strong
G623
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
아볼루온
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사(고유명사) '아볼루온'. 무저갱의 사자 인명.

원문 정의 보기

Ἀπολλύων, -οντος, ὁ (present ptcp. of ἀπολλύω), Apollyon, i.e. the Destroyer: Rev.9:11 (cf. Ἀβάδδων). (Cremer, 453; DB, i, 125, 172.) † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
첫째 화는 지나갔으나 보라 아직도 이 후에 화 둘이 이르리로다

원어

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐαὶ

ouai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3759 원어 검색에서 보기 G3759
Lemma
οὐαί
Strong
G3759
형태소
INJ
품사
-
화로다!
번역 정렬
-

정의

감탄사 '화 있을진저!, 화로다!'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐαί interj. of grief or denunciation, [in LXX for הוֹי, etc. ;] alas! woe! most frequently with dative of person(s) Mat.11:21 23:14, Mrk.13:17 14:21, Luk.6:24-26 Ju 11, al.; with vocat. (nom.), Rev.18:10, 16 18:19 (cf. Isa.1:24, al.); with accusative, Rev.12:12, before ἐκ, Rev.8:13; with dative before ἀπό (see M, Pr., 246), Mat.18:7. As subst., 1Co.9:16 (cf. Jer.6:4); ἡ οὐ., Rev.9:12 11:14; pl., Rev.9:12; οὐ., οὐ., οὐ., Rev.8:13 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μία

mia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1520 원어 검색에서 보기 G1520
Lemma
εἷς
Strong
G1520
형태소
A-NSF
품사
형용사
하나/한
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '하나, 한 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

εἷς ιά, ἕν, genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, cardinal numeral, one; __1. one, as opposite to many: Mat.25:15, Rom.5:12, 1Co.10:8, al.; as subst., Rom.5:15, Eph.2:14; id. with genitive partit., Mat.5:19, al.; before ἐκ (ἐξ), Mrk.14:18, Jhn.6:8, al.; metaphorically, of union and concord, Jhn.10:30 17:11, Rom.12:4-5, Php.1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Luk.14:18; with neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one, none (cl.), Mat.5:18 10:29, Luk.11:46 12:6. __2. Emphatically, to the exclusion of others; __(a) a single (one): Mat.21:24, Mrk.8:14; absol., 1Co.9:24, al.; οὐδὲ εἷς, Mat.27:14, Jhn.1:3, Rom.3:10, al.; __(b) one, alone: Mrk.2:7 10:18, Luk.18:19; __(with) one and the same: Rom.3:30, 1Co.3:8 11:5 12:11, 1Jn.5:8. __3. In late Gk., with weakened force, = τις or indef. art. (of. Heb. אֶחָד, Gen.22:13, al.; see B1., § 45, 2; M, Pr., 96 f.): Mat.8:19 19:6, Rev.8:13, al.; εἷς τις (Bl., l.with), Luk.22:50, Jhn.11:49 __4. Distributively: εἷς καστος (cl.), Luk.4:40, Act.2:6, al.; εἷς . . . καὶ εἷς (cl., εἷς μὲν . . . εἷς δέ), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.20:12, al. (cf. LXX and use of Heb. אֶחָד, Exo.17:12, al); ὁ εἷς . . . ὁ ἕτερος (ἄλλος) = cl. ὁ μὲν (ἕτερος) . . . ὁ δέ (ἕτερος), Mat.6:24, Luk.7:41, Rev.17:10; καθ᾽ εἷς, εἷς κ. είς (in which καθ᾽ is adverbial, or the expression formed from the analogy of ἕν καθ᾽ ἔν; M, Pr., 105), one by one, severally: Mrk.14:19, Rom.12:5, al.; εἷς τὸν ἕνα = ἀλλήλους (B1., 45, 2; M, Pr., 246), 1Th.5:11. __5. As ordinal = πρῶτος (like Heb. אֶחָד; Bl., § 45, 1; M, Pr., 95 f.), first: Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπῆλθεν·

apēlthen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G565 원어 검색에서 보기 G565
Lemma
ἀπέρχομαι
Strong
G565
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
떠나가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '떠나가다, 가버리다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπέρχομαι, [in LXX chiefly for הלךְ ;] __1. to go away, depart (also, in late writers, with "perfective" force, to arrive at a destination, the thought being carried on to the goal; M, Pr., 111f., 247; MM, see word); __(a) absol.: Mat.13:25, al.; ptcp., ἀπελθών, used pleonastically with other verbs as in Heb. (Dalman, Words, 21), Mat.13:28, al.; __(b) with mention of place or person: εἰς, Mat.14:15; ἐπί, Luk.24:24; πρός, Rev.10:9; ἀπό, Luk.1:38; ἐξω, Act.4:15; ἐκεῖ, Mat.2:22. __2. As in LXX, before ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), to go after, follow: Mrk.1:20, Jhn.12:19; metaphorically, Mrk.1:42, Rev.21:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἰδοὺ

idou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2400 원어 검색에서 보기 G2400
Lemma
ἰδού
Strong
G2400
형태소
INJ
품사
-
보라!
번역 정렬
-

정의

감탄사 '보라!, 자!'.

원문 정의 보기

ἰδού, [in LXX chiefly for הִנֵּה,] prop. imperat. 2 aor. mid. of ὁράω, used as a demonstrative particle, with frequency much greater in LXX and NT than in cl. (see M, Pr., 11), lo, behold, see: Mat.10:16 11:8 13:3, Mrk.3:32, Luk.2:48, 1Co.15:51, Jas.5:9, Ju 14, Rev.1:7, al.; after genitive absol., Mat.1:20 2:1, 13 12:46, al.; καὶ ἰδού, Mat.2:9 (and freq.), Luk.1:20 10:25, Act.12:7, al.; in elliptical sentences, taking the place of copula or predicate (like הִנֵּה in Heb.), Mat.3:17, Luk.5:12 22:31, 47 Act.8:27, 36 al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔρχεται

erchetai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-PNI-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔτι

eti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2089 원어 검색에서 보기 G2089
Lemma
ἔτι
Strong
G2089
형태소
ADV
품사
-
아직/여전히
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직, 여전히, 더'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔτι adv., yet, as yet, still; __1. of time; __(a) of the present (adhuc): Mrk.5:35, 1Co.3:3 15:17, Gal.1:10, al.; __(b) of the past, mostly with impf.: Mat.12:46, Luk.8:49 15:20, Jhn.20:1, Act.9:1, Rom.5:6, 8, 2Th.2:5, Heb.7:10 9:8, al.; __(with) of the future: Luk.1:15, 2Co.1:10; __(d) with a neg.: Mat.5:13, Luk.16:2 20:36, Heb.10:2, Rev.3:12 20:3, al. __2. Of degree, even, yet, still, further: with compar., Php.1:9, Heb.7:15; of what remains, Mrk.12:6, Jhn.4:35 7:33, al.; of what is added, Mat.18:16 26:65, Heb.11:32 12:26-27; of con­tinuance apart from the idea of time, Rom.3:7 6:2 9:19, Gal.5:11; ἔτι δἐ, Act.2:26 (LXX), Heb.11:36; ἔτι τε καί, Luk.14:26, Act.21:28 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δύο

duo

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1417 원어 검색에서 보기 G1417
Lemma
δύο
Strong
G1417
형태소
A-NUI
품사
형용사
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '둘, 두 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

δύο, numeral, indecl. exc. in dative, δυσί, δυσίν (Attic δυοῖν), two: Mat.19:6, Mrk.10:8, Jhn.2:6, al.; with pl. noun, Mat.9:27 10:10, al.; οἱ, τῶν, τοὺς δ., Mat.19:5 20:24, Mrk.10:8, Eph.2:15, al.; δ. ἐξ, Luk.24:13; distrib., ἀνὰ, κατὰ δ., two and two, two apiece: Luk.10:1 (WH, ἀνὰ δ. [δύο]), Jhn.2:6, 1Co.14:27; δύο δύο (= ἀνὰ δ., as LXX, Gen.6:19 for שְׁנַיִם שְׁנַיִם, but not merely "Hebraism," cf. μυρία μυρία, Æsch., Pers., 981, and for usage in π. and MGr., see M, Pr., 21, 97), Mrk.6:7; εἰς δ. (two and two, Xen., Cyr., 7, 5, 17), into two parts, Mat.27:51, Mrk.15:38. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐαὶ

ouai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3759 원어 검색에서 보기 G3759
Lemma
οὐαί
Strong
G3759
형태소
INJ
품사
-
화로다!
번역 정렬
-

정의

감탄사 '화 있을진저!, 화로다!'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐαί interj. of grief or denunciation, [in LXX for הוֹי, etc. ;] alas! woe! most frequently with dative of person(s) Mat.11:21 23:14, Mrk.13:17 14:21, Luk.6:24-26 Ju 11, al.; with vocat. (nom.), Rev.18:10, 16 18:19 (cf. Isa.1:24, al.); with accusative, Rev.12:12, before ἐκ, Rev.8:13; with dative before ἀπό (see M, Pr., 246), Mat.18:7. As subst., 1Co.9:16 (cf. Jer.6:4); ἡ οὐ., Rev.9:12 11:14; pl., Rev.9:12; οὐ., οὐ., οὐ., Rev.8:13 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῦτα.¶

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
여섯째 천사가 나팔을 불매 내가 들으니 하나님 앞 금단 네 뿔에서 한 음성이 나서

원어

Καὶ

Kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἕκτος

hektos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1623 원어 검색에서 보기 G1623
Lemma
ἕκτος
Strong
G1623
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
여섯째
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '여섯째의'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκτός, adv. [in LXX Jdg.8:26 20:15, 3Ki.10:13, al. (בַּד, Jdg.5:28 (בַּד), בַּד), Sng.4:1-3 (בַּד), al, ;] __1. as adv., outside, beyond: τὸ ἐ., with poss. genitive, the outside, Mat.23:26; in late Gk. (see Deiss., BS, 118), pleonastic, ἐκτός εἰ μή, 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __2. With force of prep., with genitive; __(a) outside of: 1Co.6:18, 2Co.12:2; __(b) beyond, besides, except: Act.26:22, 1Co.15:27.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄγγελος

angelos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G32 원어 검색에서 보기 G32
Lemma
ἄγγελος
Strong
G32
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
천사/사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천사, 사자(使者)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ ;] __1. a messenger, one sent: Mat.11:10, Jas.22:25. __2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Luk.1:11, or to execute them, as Mat.4:6. The ἄ. in Rev.1:20-2:1, al., is variously understood as __(1) a messenger or delegate, __(2) a bishop or ruler, __(3) a guardian angel, __(4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, see word; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐσάλπισεν,

esalpisen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4537 원어 검색에서 보기 G4537
Lemma
σαλπίζω
Strong
G4537
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
나팔을 불다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나팔을 불다'.

원문 정의 보기

σαλπίζω [in LXX chiefly for תָּקַע ;] to sound a trumpet: Rev.8:6 ff. Rev.9:1, 13 10:7 11:15; metaphorically, Mat.6:2. Impers., the trumpet sounds: 1Co.15:52.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤκουσα

ēkousa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAI-1S
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φωνὴν

phōnēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5456 원어 검색에서 보기 G5456
Lemma
φωνή
Strong
G5456
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
소리/음성
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소리, 음성'.

원문 정의 보기

φωνή, -ῆς, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for קוֹל ;] a voice; __(a) prop., of persons, Mat.2:18 (LXX), al.; φ. αἴρειν (ἐπαίρειν), Luk.17:13, Act.2:14, al.; φ. μεγάλῃ εἰπεῖν (λέγειν, φωνεῖν, etc.), Luk.8:28, Act.7:57, Rev.5:12, al.; γίνεται (ἔρχεται) φ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν (ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), Mrk.1:11, Luk.3:22, Jhn.12:28, al. (cf. DCG, ii, 810a; Dalman, Words, 204f.); ἀκούειν φωνήν (-ῆς; see: ἀκούω), Act.9:4, 7 al.; φ. βοῶντος, Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, Luk.3:4, Jhn.1:23" (LXX) ; τ. θεοῦ, Jhn.5:37, Heb.3:7, al. By meton., __(α) of the speaker, βλέπειν τὴν φ., Rev.1:12; __(β) speech, language ( Gen.11:1, 4Ma.12:7, al.): 1Co.14:10; __(b) of inanimate things: Mat.24:31, Jhn.3:8, Act.2:6, Rev.1:15b 9:9 14:2, al. (cf. Tr., Syn., §lxxxix). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μίαν

mian

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1520 원어 검색에서 보기 G1520
Lemma
εἷς
Strong
G1520
형태소
A-ASF
품사
형용사
하나/한
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '하나, 한 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

εἷς ιά, ἕν, genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, cardinal numeral, one; __1. one, as opposite to many: Mat.25:15, Rom.5:12, 1Co.10:8, al.; as subst., Rom.5:15, Eph.2:14; id. with genitive partit., Mat.5:19, al.; before ἐκ (ἐξ), Mrk.14:18, Jhn.6:8, al.; metaphorically, of union and concord, Jhn.10:30 17:11, Rom.12:4-5, Php.1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Luk.14:18; with neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one, none (cl.), Mat.5:18 10:29, Luk.11:46 12:6. __2. Emphatically, to the exclusion of others; __(a) a single (one): Mat.21:24, Mrk.8:14; absol., 1Co.9:24, al.; οὐδὲ εἷς, Mat.27:14, Jhn.1:3, Rom.3:10, al.; __(b) one, alone: Mrk.2:7 10:18, Luk.18:19; __(with) one and the same: Rom.3:30, 1Co.3:8 11:5 12:11, 1Jn.5:8. __3. In late Gk., with weakened force, = τις or indef. art. (of. Heb. אֶחָד, Gen.22:13, al.; see B1., § 45, 2; M, Pr., 96 f.): Mat.8:19 19:6, Rev.8:13, al.; εἷς τις (Bl., l.with), Luk.22:50, Jhn.11:49 __4. Distributively: εἷς καστος (cl.), Luk.4:40, Act.2:6, al.; εἷς . . . καὶ εἷς (cl., εἷς μὲν . . . εἷς δέ), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.20:12, al. (cf. LXX and use of Heb. אֶחָד, Exo.17:12, al); ὁ εἷς . . . ὁ ἕτερος (ἄλλος) = cl. ὁ μὲν (ἕτερος) . . . ὁ δέ (ἕτερος), Mat.6:24, Luk.7:41, Rev.17:10; καθ᾽ εἷς, εἷς κ. είς (in which καθ᾽ is adverbial, or the expression formed from the analogy of ἕν καθ᾽ ἔν; M, Pr., 105), one by one, severally: Mrk.14:19, Rom.12:5, al.; εἷς τὸν ἕνα = ἀλλήλους (B1., 45, 2; M, Pr., 246), 1Th.5:11. __5. As ordinal = πρῶτος (like Heb. אֶחָד; Bl., § 45, 1; M, Pr., 95 f.), first: Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τεσσάρων

tessarōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5064 원어 검색에서 보기 G5064
Lemma
τέσσαρες
Strong
G5064
형태소
A-GPN
품사
형용사
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '넷, 네 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

τέσσαρες (and Ion. and late -ερεν, and late accusative -εν; see WH, App., 150; M, Pr., 36, 45 f.), οἱ, αἱ, -αρα, τά, genitive, -ων, four: Mat.24:31, Mrk.2:3, Luk.2:37, Jhn.11:17 19:23, Act.10:11, Rev.4:4, 6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κεράτων

keratōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2768 원어 검색에서 보기 G2768
Lemma
κέρας
Strong
G2768
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '뿔; (제단의) 뿔'.

원문 정의 보기

κέρας, -ατος (pl. not irreg. as in Attic), τό, [in LXX chiefly for קָרַן ;] a horn: Rev.5:6 12:3 13:1, 11 17:3, 7 17:12, 16; of the projections at the corners of the altar (Exo.29:12, al.): Rev.9:13. Metaphorical, as symbol of strength, κ. σωτηρίας (cf. Psa.18:3, al.): Luk.1:69.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θυσιαστηρίου

thusiastēriou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2379 원어 검색에서 보기 G2379
Lemma
θυσιαστήριον
Strong
G2379
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
제단
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '제단'.

원문 정의 보기

θυσιαστήριον, -ου, τό (θυσιάζω, to sacrifice), [in LXX (where the word first appears) very freq., nearly always for מַדְבַּח ;] an altar: __(a) generally, Jas.2:21; pl., Rom.11:3 (LXX); metaphorically, Heb.13:10 (see Westc., in l, and esp. his add, note on the history of the word, 455 ff.); __(b) of the altar of burnt-offering in the Temple, Mat.5:23-24 23:18-20, 35, Luk.11:51, 1Co.9:13 10:18, Heb.7:13, Rev.11:1; __(with) of the altar of incense in the sanctuary (Exo.30:1, al.), Luk.1:11; symbolically in Heaven, Rev.6:9 8:3 9:13 14:18 16:7 (Cremer, 292).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χρυσοῦ

chrusou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5552 원어 검색에서 보기 G5552
Lemma
χρύσεος
Strong
G5552
형태소
A-GSN
품사
형용사
금의/금으로 된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '금의, 금으로 만든'.

원문 정의 보기

Χρύσεος, -εα, -εον (-οῦς, -ῆ, -οῦν; on accusative sing. fem., -ᾶν, Rev.1:13 and genitive pl. uncontr., -εων, Rev.2:1, LTr., see M, Pr., 48 and cf. Thackeray, Gr., x, 172 f.) (χρυσός), [in LXX chiefly for זָהָב ;] golden, i.e. made or overlaid with gold: 2Ti.2:20, Heb.9:4, Rev.1:12-13, 20 2:1 4:4 5:8 8:3 9:13, 20 14:14 15:6-7 17:4 21:15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐνώπιον

enōpion

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1799 원어 검색에서 보기 G1799
Lemma
ἐνώπιον
Strong
G1799
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~앞에서
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사 '~앞에서, ~목전에'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐνώπιος, -ον (ὤψ), [in LXX for פָּנִים, etc. ;] face to face, in sight (Theocr.; ἄρτοι ἐ., Exo.25:29): neut., ἐνώπιον, in vernacular, with force of prep. with genitive [in LXX for פָּנִים, עַיִן, etc., cf. Dalman, Words, 31 f., 209 f., and Deiss., BS., 213], in NT, most frequently in Lk, Ac, Re, never in Mt, Mk, before, in the presence of: Luk.1:19 Luk.4:7, Act.4:10 Act.6:5, Rev.1:4 2:14, al.; esp. ἐ. Κυρίου (θεοῦ), in the sight of God, or with God as witness or as judge, Rom.14:22, 1Co.1:29, 1Ti.2:3, Jas.4:10, 1Pe.3:4, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεοῦ

theou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2316 원어 검색에서 보기 G2316
Lemma
θεός
Strong
G2316
형태소
N-GSM-T
품사
명사
하나님/신
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하나님, 신(神)'.

원문 정의 보기

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Act.19:37 only; see M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mat.27:46; cf. Deu.3:24, al.), [in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc. ;] a god or deity, God. __1. In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Act.28:6, 1Co.8:4, 2Th.2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Gal.4:8, al. __2. Of the one true God; __(a) anarthrous: Mat.6:24, Luk.20:38, al.; esp. with prep. (Kühner 3, iii, 605), ἀπὸ θ., Jhn.3:2; ἐκ, Act.5:39, 2Co.5:1, Php.3:9; ὑπό, Rom.13:1; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jhn.1:6; παρὰ θεῷ, 2Th.1:6, 1Pe.2:4; κατὰ θεόν, Rom.8:27, 2Co.7:9, 10; also when in genitive dependent on an anarth. noun (Bl., §46, 6), Mat.27:43, Luk.3:2, Rom.1:17, 1Th.2:13; as pred., Lk 20:38, Jhn.1:1, and when the nature and character rather than the person of God is meant, Act.5:29, Gal.2:6, al. (M, Th., 14); __(b) more freq., with art.: Mat.1:23, Mrk.2:7, al. mult.; with prep., ἀπὸ τ. θ., Luk.1:26; ἐκ, Jhn.8:42, al.; παρὰ τοῦ θ., Jhn.8:40; π. τῷ θ., Rom.9:14; ἐν, Col.3:3; ἐπὶ τῷ θ., Luk.1:47; ἐπὶ τὸν θ., Act.15:19; εἰς τ. θ., Act.24:15; πρὸς τ. θ., Jhn.1:2; with genitive of person(s), Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:26, 27, Luk.20:37, Jhn.20:17, al.; ὁ θ. μου, Rom.1:8, Php 1:3, al.; ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ κ. τ. λ., Rom.15:6, Eph.1:3, Phi 4:20, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Rom.15:5, 13, 33, 2Co.1:3, 1Th.5:23; τὰ τ. θεοῦ, Mat.16:23, Mrk.12:17, 1Co.2:11; τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ., Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; τ. θεῷ, as a superl. (LXX, Jos.3:3), Act.7:20, 2Co.10:4; Hebraistically, of judges (Psa.81(82):6), Jhn.10:34" (LXX), 35. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
나팔 가진 여섯째 천사에게 말하기를 큰 강 유브라데에 결박한 네 천사를 놓아 주라 하매

원어

λέγοντα

legonta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAP-ASM
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἕκτῳ

hektō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1623 원어 검색에서 보기 G1623
Lemma
ἕκτος
Strong
G1623
형태소
A-DSM
품사
형용사
여섯째
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '여섯째의'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκτός, adv. [in LXX Jdg.8:26 20:15, 3Ki.10:13, al. (בַּד, Jdg.5:28 (בַּד), בַּד), Sng.4:1-3 (בַּד), al, ;] __1. as adv., outside, beyond: τὸ ἐ., with poss. genitive, the outside, Mat.23:26; in late Gk. (see Deiss., BS, 118), pleonastic, ἐκτός εἰ μή, 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __2. With force of prep., with genitive; __(a) outside of: 1Co.6:18, 2Co.12:2; __(b) beyond, besides, except: Act.26:22, 1Co.15:27.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀγγέλῳ

angelō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G32 원어 검색에서 보기 G32
Lemma
ἄγγελος
Strong
G32
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
천사/사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천사, 사자(使者)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ ;] __1. a messenger, one sent: Mat.11:10, Jas.22:25. __2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Luk.1:11, or to execute them, as Mat.4:6. The ἄ. in Rev.1:20-2:1, al., is variously understood as __(1) a messenger or delegate, __(2) a bishop or ruler, __(3) a guardian angel, __(4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, see word; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχων

echōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σάλπιγγα·

salpinga

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4536 원어 검색에서 보기 G4536
Lemma
σάλπιγξ
Strong
G4536
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
나팔
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '나팔'.

원문 정의 보기

σάλπιγξ, -ιγγος, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for שׁוֹפָר, חֲצֹצְרָה ;] a trumpet, used in war and in religious ceremonies: 1Co.14:8, Heb.12:19, Rev.1:10 4:1 8:2, 6 8:11 9:14 By meton., a trumpet blast: μετὰ σ. μεγάλης, Mat.24:31; ἐν σ. θεοῦ, 1Th.4:16; ἐν τ. ἐσχάτῃ σ., 1Co.15:52.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λῦσον

luson

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3089 원어 검색에서 보기 G3089
Lemma
λύω
Strong
G3089
형태소
V-AAM-2S
품사
동사
풀다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '풀다, 끄르다, 폐하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λύω [in LXX for פָּתַח, נָתַר hi., etc. ;] __1. to loose, unbind, release: of things, Mrk.1:7, Luk.3:16, al.; of beasts, Mat.21:2, Luk.13:15, al.; of persons, Jhn.11:44, Act.22:30; of Satan, Rev.20:3, 7; metaphorically, of the marriage tie, 1Co.7:27; of one diseased, Luk.13:16; of release from sin, Rev.1:5, WH, R, txt. (see: λούω). __2. To resolve a whole into its parts, loosen, dissolve, break up, destroy: Jhn.2:19, Act.27:41, Rev.5:2; metaphorically, 2Pe.3:11; of an assembly, to dismiss: Act.13:43; τ. μεσότοιχον τ. φραγμοῦ, Eph.2:14; τ. στοιχεῖα, 2Pe.3:10; οὐρανοί, 2Pe.3:12; τ. ἔργα τ. διαβόλου, 1Jn.3:8; τ. ὠδῖνας τ. θανάτου, Act.2:24; of laws, etc., to break, annul, cancel (MM, xvi): ἐντολήν, Mat.5:19; τ. νόμον, Jhn.7:23; τ. σάββατον, Jhn.5:18; τ. γραφήν, Jhn.10:35. (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-λύω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τέσσαρας

tessaras

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5064 원어 검색에서 보기 G5064
Lemma
τέσσαρες
Strong
G5064
형태소
A-APM
품사
형용사
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '넷, 네 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

τέσσαρες (and Ion. and late -ερεν, and late accusative -εν; see WH, App., 150; M, Pr., 36, 45 f.), οἱ, αἱ, -αρα, τά, genitive, -ων, four: Mat.24:31, Mrk.2:3, Luk.2:37, Jhn.11:17 19:23, Act.10:11, Rev.4:4, 6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀγγέλους

angelous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G32 원어 검색에서 보기 G32
Lemma
ἄγγελος
Strong
G32
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
천사/사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천사, 사자(使者)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ ;] __1. a messenger, one sent: Mat.11:10, Jas.22:25. __2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Luk.1:11, or to execute them, as Mat.4:6. The ἄ. in Rev.1:20-2:1, al., is variously understood as __(1) a messenger or delegate, __(2) a bishop or ruler, __(3) a guardian angel, __(4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, see word; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δεδεμένους

dedemenous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1210 원어 검색에서 보기 G1210
Lemma
δέω
Strong
G1210
형태소
V-RPP-APM
품사
동사
매다/묶다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '매다, 묶다, 결박하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δέω (I), [in LXX chiefly for אסר ;] to tie, bind, fasten; __(1) with accusative of thing(s), before εἰς δεσμάς, Mat.13:30; of an ass, Mat.21:2, Mrk.11:2, 4 Luk.19:30. __(2) with accusative of person(s), of swathing a dead body, ὀθονίοις, Jhn.19:40; δεδομένος τ. πόδας . . . κειρίαις (Bl., §34, 6; Kühner 3, iii, 125), Jhn.11:44; of binding with chains, ἀγγέλους, Rev.9:14; a demoniac, πέδαις κ. ἁλύσεσι, Mrk.5:3, 4; captives, Mat.12:29 14:3 22:13 27:2, Mrk.3:27 6:17 15:1, 7, Jhn.18:12, 24, Act.9:2, 14, 21, 21:11, 13 22:5, 29 24:27, Col.4:3, Rev.20:2; ἁλύσεσι, Act.12:6 21:33. Metaphorical, ὁ λόγος τ. Θεοῦ, 2Ti.2:9; of Satan binding by disease (MM, see word), Luk.13:16; of constraint or obligation, Act.20:22; of the marriage bond, 1Co.7:39; id. with dative of person(s), ἀνδρί, Rom.7:2; γυναικί, 1Co.7:27; in Rabbinic lang. (Dalman, Words, 213f.), to forbid, declare forbidden, Mat.16:19 18:18 (cf. κατα-, περι-, συν-, ὐπο-δέω; Cremer, 82). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποταμῷ

potamō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4215 원어 검색에서 보기 G4215
Lemma
ποταμός
Strong
G4215
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '강, 시내'.

원문 정의 보기

ποταμός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for נָהָר, יְאֹר ;] a river, stream, torrent: Mat.3:5 7:25, 27, Mrk.1:1-45 :, Luk.6:48-49, Act.16:13, 2Co.11:26, Rev.8:10 9:14 12:15-16 16:4, 12 21:1-2. Fig., pl., π. ὕδατος ζῶντος, Jhn.7:38.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεγάλῳ

megalō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3173 원어 검색에서 보기 G3173
Lemma
μέγας
Strong
G3173
형태소
A-DSM
품사
형용사
큰/위대한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '큰, 위대한'.

원문 정의 보기

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [in LXX chiefly for גָּדוֹל, also for מַרְבֶּה ,רַב (incl. μείζων), רֹב (μέγιστος) ;] great; __1. of external form, bodily size, measure, extent: λίθος, Mat.2:60; δράκων, Rev.12:3; ἰχθῦς, Jhn.21:11; πόλις, Rev.11:8; μάχαιρα, Rev.6:4, al. __2. Of intensity and degree: δύναμις, Act.4:33; φόβος, Mrk.4:41; ἀγάπη, Jhn.15:13; ἄνεμος, 'ib. 6:18; κραυγή, Act.23:9; φῶς, Mat.4:16; πυρετός, Luk.4:38; θλίψις, Mat.24:21. __3. Of rank; __(a) of persons: θεός (MM, xvi), Tit.2:13; Ἄρτεμις, Act.19:27; compar. (see infr.), Mat.18:1 (cf. Dalman, Words, 113f.); neut. for masc. (Bl., §32, 1), Mat.12:6; __(b) of things: ἁμαρτία, Jhn.19:11; μυστήριον, Eph.5:32; = μεγίστη (see infr., and cf. Field, Notes, 16f.), Mat.22:36; compar. for superl. (M, Pr., 78), 1Co.13:13. __4. __(a) Compar., μείζων: Mat.11:11 23:17, al.; neut. pl., μείζονα, contr. μείζω, Jhn.1:51; double compar., μειζότερος (M, Pr., 236; Bl., §11, 4), III Jo 4; __(b) superl, μέγιστος (Deiss., BS, 365), 2Pe.1:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Εὐφράτῃ.

Euphratē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2166 원어 검색에서 보기 G2166
Lemma
Εὐφράτης
Strong
G2166
형태소
N-DSM-L
품사
명사
유브라데
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 지명 '유브라데'(강 이름).

원문 정의 보기

Εὐφράτης, -ου, ὁ the river Euphrates: Rev.9:14 16:12.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
네 천사가 놓였으니 그들은 그 년 월 일 시에 이르러 사람 삼분의 일을 죽이기로 예비한 자들이더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλύθησαν

eluthēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3089 원어 검색에서 보기 G3089
Lemma
λύω
Strong
G3089
형태소
V-API-3P
품사
동사
풀다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '풀다, 끄르다, 폐하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λύω [in LXX for פָּתַח, נָתַר hi., etc. ;] __1. to loose, unbind, release: of things, Mrk.1:7, Luk.3:16, al.; of beasts, Mat.21:2, Luk.13:15, al.; of persons, Jhn.11:44, Act.22:30; of Satan, Rev.20:3, 7; metaphorically, of the marriage tie, 1Co.7:27; of one diseased, Luk.13:16; of release from sin, Rev.1:5, WH, R, txt. (see: λούω). __2. To resolve a whole into its parts, loosen, dissolve, break up, destroy: Jhn.2:19, Act.27:41, Rev.5:2; metaphorically, 2Pe.3:11; of an assembly, to dismiss: Act.13:43; τ. μεσότοιχον τ. φραγμοῦ, Eph.2:14; τ. στοιχεῖα, 2Pe.3:10; οὐρανοί, 2Pe.3:12; τ. ἔργα τ. διαβόλου, 1Jn.3:8; τ. ὠδῖνας τ. θανάτου, Act.2:24; of laws, etc., to break, annul, cancel (MM, xvi): ἐντολήν, Mat.5:19; τ. νόμον, Jhn.7:23; τ. σάββατον, Jhn.5:18; τ. γραφήν, Jhn.10:35. (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-λύω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τέσσαρες

tessares

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5064 원어 검색에서 보기 G5064
Lemma
τέσσαρες
Strong
G5064
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '넷, 네 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

τέσσαρες (and Ion. and late -ερεν, and late accusative -εν; see WH, App., 150; M, Pr., 36, 45 f.), οἱ, αἱ, -αρα, τά, genitive, -ων, four: Mat.24:31, Mrk.2:3, Luk.2:37, Jhn.11:17 19:23, Act.10:11, Rev.4:4, 6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄγγελοι

angeloi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G32 원어 검색에서 보기 G32
Lemma
ἄγγελος
Strong
G32
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
천사/사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천사, 사자(使者)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ ;] __1. a messenger, one sent: Mat.11:10, Jas.22:25. __2. As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Luk.1:11, or to execute them, as Mat.4:6. The ἄ. in Rev.1:20-2:1, al., is variously understood as __(1) a messenger or delegate, __(2) a bishop or ruler, __(3) a guardian angel, __(4) the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, see word; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡτοιμασμένοι

hētoimasmenoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2090 원어 검색에서 보기 G2090
Lemma
ἑτοιμάζω
Strong
G2090
형태소
V-RPP-NPM
품사
동사
준비하다/예비하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '준비하다, 예비하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑτοιμάζω (ἕτοιμος), [in LXX chiefly for כּוּן hi. (Hatch, Essays, 51 a.) ;] to prepare, make ready; __(a) absol., of hospitable preparation: Mrk.14:15, Luk.9:52 12:47 22:9, 12; with inf., Mat.26:17; ἵνα, Mrk.14:12; __(b) with accusative of thing(s): Mat.22:4 26:19, Mrk.14:16, Luk.12:20 17:8 22:8, 13 23:56 24:1, Jhn.14:2-3, Phm 22, Rev.9:7 16:12; before εἰς, 2Ti.2:21; of God's ordaining coming events (Dalman, Words, 128); of blessing, Mat.20:23 25:34, Mrk.10:40, Luk.2:31, 1Co.2:9, Heb.11:16, Rev.12:6; of judgment, Mat.25:41; of preparation for the Messiah, τ. ὁδὸν κυρίου, Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, Luk.1:76 3:4" (LXX) ; __(with) with accusative of person(s): Luk.1:17, Act.23:23, Rev.19:7, before ἵνα, Rev.8:6; εἰς, 2Ti.2:21, Rev.9:7, 15 21:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὥραν

hōran

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5610 원어 검색에서 보기 G5610
Lemma
ὥρα
Strong
G5610
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
때/시각
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '시간, 때, 시각'.

원문 정의 보기

ὥρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for עֵת and in Da for שָׁעָה ;] __1. any time or period fixed by nature, esp. a season (Hom., Hdt., Plat., al.). __2. A part of the day, and esp. a twelfth part of day or night, an hour: Mat.24:36, Mrk.13:32, Act.10:3, al.; accus. in ans. to "when"? (M, Pr., 63, 215; Bl., §34, 8), Jhn.4:52, Act.10:3, 30 1Co.15:30, Rev.3:3; accusative of duration, Mat.20:12 26, Mrk.14:37; inexactly, πρὸς ὥραν, for a season, for a time, Jhn.5:35, 2Co.7:8, Gal.2:5; πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας, for a short season (ICC, in l.), 1Th.2:17. __3. A definite point of time, time, hour: Mat.26:45; with genitive of thing(s), Luk.1:10 14:17, Rev.3:10, al.; with genitive of person(s), Luk.22:53, Jhn.2:4 7:30, al.; ἡ ἄρτι ὥρα, 1Co.4:11; ἐσχάτη ὥ., 1Jn.2:18; before ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23 5:25 16:25; ἵνα, Jhn.12:23, al.; with accusative and inf., Rom.13:11 (cf. DB, ext., 475b 476b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέραν

hēmeran

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2250 원어 검색에서 보기 G2250
Lemma
ἡμέρα
Strong
G2250
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
날/하루
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날, 하루, 낮'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם ;] day; __1. as distinct from night: genitive ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Rev.21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ̔ἡ.), Act.9:24, 1Th.2:9, 2Th.3:8, Rev.4:8 (BL, §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Act.26:13; accusative durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Luk.21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Rom.8:36; ἐν ἡμέρα, Jhn.11:9, Rom.13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Luk.2:44; ἡ. γίνεται, Lk 4:42 22:66; κλίνει, Luk.9:12, al.; metaphorically, Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:4, 5 8, 2Pe.1:19. __2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night: Mat.6:34, Mrk.6:21, Luk.13:14, al.; τρίτῃ ἡ., Mat.16:21; ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. (cf. יוֹם בְּיוֹם, Est.3:4), 2Co.4:16; ὅλην τ. ἡ., Rom.8:36 10:21; pl., Jhn.2:12, Act.9:19, al.; ἡ. τῶν ἀζύμων, Act.12:3; τ. σαββάτου, Luk.13:14, 16; ἡ κυριάκη ἡ., Rev.1:10. __3. In Messianic sense, of the last day: ἡ ἡ. (ἐκείνη, τ. κυρίου, etc.), Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, Rom.13:12, 1Co.1:8, 1Th.5:2, 2Th.2:2, 2Pe.3:10, al; by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, ἡ. ἀνθρωπίνη, of a human tribunal, 1Co.4:3 (EV, man's judgment). __4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, §46, 9; M, Pr., 81), of time in general: Jhn.8:56 14:20, 2Co.6:2, Eph.6:13, 2Pe.3:18; pl. Act.15:7, Eph.5:16, Heb.10:32; πᾶσας τὰς ἡ. (cf. כָּל הַיָּמִים, Deu.4:40, al.; MM, Exp., xv), Mat.28:20; ἐλεύσονται ἡ. ὅταν (ὅτε), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35 17:22; αἱ ἡ., with genitive of person(s) (Gen.26:1, al.), Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Act.7:45, 1Pe.3:20; ἀρχ̀ ἡμερῶν, Heb.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μῆνα

mēna

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3376 원어 검색에서 보기 G3376
Lemma
μήν
Strong
G3376
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
달/월
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '달, 월'.

원문 정의 보기

μήν genitive, μηνός, ὁ, [in LXX very frequently for חֹדֶשׁ, Gen.7:11, al.; a few times for יֶרַח ;] a month: Luk.1:24, 26 1:36, 56 4:25, Act.7:20 18:11 19:8 20:3 28:11, Jas.5:17, Rev.9:5, 10 9:15 11:2 13:5 22:2; pl., of the festival of the new moon (cf. Isa.66:23), Gal.4:10.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐνιαυτὸν

eniauton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1763 원어 검색에서 보기 G1763
Lemma
ἐνιαυτός
Strong
G1763
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
해/년
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '해, 일 년'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐνιαυτός, -oῦ, ὁ [in LXX for שָׁנֶה ;] __1. prop., a cycle of time. __2. = ἔτος, a year: Jhn.11:49, 51 18:13, Act.11:26 18:11, Jas.5:17, Rev.9:15; pl., of sabbatical years, Gal.4:10; ποιεῖν ἐ., to spend a year, Jas.4:13;ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐ., Heb.9:7; κατ᾽ ἐ., Heb.9:25 10:1, 3; ἐ. δεκτόν, Luk.4:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποκτείνωσιν

apokteinōsin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-AAS-3P
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τρίτον

triton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5154 원어 검색에서 보기 G5154
Lemma
τρίτος
Strong
G5154
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
셋째
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '셋째의'.

원문 정의 보기

τρίτος, -η, -ον the third: Mat.22:26, Mrk.12:21 15:25, Luk.24:21, Act.2:15, al.; τῇ τ. ἡμέρᾳ (i.e. the next day but one: Xen., al.; see Field, Notes, 11 ff.), Mat.16:21, Luk.24:46, al.; substantively, accusative masc., τρίτον, a third (servant), Luk.20:12; neut., τὸ τ., with genitive, the third part of: Rev.8:7-12 9:15, 18 12:4. As adv., τὸ τ., the third time: Mrk.14:41, Jhn.21:17; anarth., τρίτον, a third time, Luk.23:22, Jhn.21:14, 2Co.12:14 13:1; in enumerations, thirdly, 1Co.12:28; ἐκ τ., a third time, Mat.26:44 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπων.

anthrōpōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
마병대의 수는 이만 만이니 내가 그들의 수를 들었노라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀριθμὸς

arithmos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G706 원어 검색에서 보기 G706
Lemma
ἀριθμός
Strong
G706
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
수/숫자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '수, 숫자, 무리'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀριθμός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for מִסְפָּר ;] number, a number: Luk.22:3, Jhn.6:10, Act.4:4 5:36 6:7 11:21 16:5, Rom.9:27, Rev.5:11 7:4 9:16 13:17-18 15:2 20:8 (for exx. of mystical use in π., see MM, see word).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στρατευμάτων

strateumatōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4753 원어 검색에서 보기 G4753
Lemma
στράτευμα
Strong
G4753
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
군대
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '군대, 군병'.

원문 정의 보기

στράτευμα, -τος, τό (στρατεύω), [in LXX: 1Ma.9:34, 2Ma.5:24 2Mac 8:21 2Mac 12:38 2Mac 13:13; pl., Jdth.11:8, 4Ma.5:1 * ;] __1. = στρατεία (Hdt., al.). __2. an army, a host: pl., Mat.22:7, Rev.9:16 19:14, 19; = soldiers, company of soldiers, Act.23:10, 27; pl., Luk.23:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἱππικοῦ

hippikou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2461 원어 검색에서 보기 G2461
Lemma
ἱππικός
Strong
G2461
형태소
A-GSN
품사
형용사
기병
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '기병, 기마병'(계 9장).

원문 정의 보기

ἱππικός, -ή, -όν (ἵππος), [in LXX: 1Ma.15:33, 3Ma.1:1 * ;] of a horse or of horsemen, equestrian; as subst., τὸ ἱ (sc. στράτευμα), cavalry: Heb.9:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δισμυριάδες

dismuriades

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1364 원어 검색에서 보기 G1364
Lemma
δίς
Strong
G1364
형태소
ADV + G3461=N-NPF
품사
-
두 번
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '두 번'.

원문 정의 보기

δίς adv., twice: Mrk.14:30, 72; δ. τ. σαββάτου, Luk.18:12; καὶ ἅπαξ κ. δ., Php.4:16, 1Th.2:18; δ. ἀποθανόντα, Ju 12 (see Mayor, ICC, in l); δ. μυριάδες, Rev.9:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μυριάδων·

muriadōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3461 원어 검색에서 보기 G3461
Lemma
μυριάς
Strong
G3461
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
만(萬)/무수
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '만, 무수한 수'.

원문 정의 보기

μυριάς, -άδος, ἡ (μυρίος), [in LXX chiefly for רְבָבָה ;] ten thousand, a myriad: pl., Act.19:19, Rev.5:11 9:16; hyperb., of vast numbers, Luk.12:1, Act.21:20, Heb.12:12, Ju 14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤκουσα

ēkousa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAI-1S
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀριθμὸν

arithmon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G706 원어 검색에서 보기 G706
Lemma
ἀριθμός
Strong
G706
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
수/숫자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '수, 숫자, 무리'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀριθμός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for מִסְפָּר ;] number, a number: Luk.22:3, Jhn.6:10, Act.4:4 5:36 6:7 11:21 16:5, Rom.9:27, Rev.5:11 7:4 9:16 13:17-18 15:2 20:8 (for exx. of mystical use in π., see MM, see word).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν.¶

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPN
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
이같이 이상한 가운데 그 말들과 그 탄 자들을 보니 불빛과 자주빛과 유황빛 흉갑이 있고 또 말들의 머리는 사자 머리 같고 그 입에서는 불과 연기와 유황이 나오더라

원어

Καὶ

Kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὕτως

houtōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3779 원어 검색에서 보기 G3779
Lemma
οὕτως
Strong
G3779
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이와 같이
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '이와 같이, 그렇게'.

원문 정의 보기

οὕτως, rarely (Bl., §5, 4; WH, App., 146f.) οὕτω, adv. (οὗτος), [in LXX chiefly for כֵּן ;] in this way, so, thus; __1. referring to what precedes: Mat.5:16 6:30, Mrk.10:43 14:59, Luk.1:25 2:48 15:7, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:15, 1Co.8:12, al.; οὕτως καί, Mat.17:12, Mrk.13:29, al.; pleonastically, resuming a ptcp. (cl.; see Bl., §74, 6), Act.20:11 27:17. __2. Referring to what follows: Mat.1:18 6:9, Luk.19:31, Jhn.21:1, 1Pe.2:15; bef. quotations from OT, Mat.2:5, Act.7:6, 1Co.15:45, Heb.4:4. __3. C. adj. (marking intensity): Heb.12:21, Rev.16:18; similarly with adv., Gal.1:6 (cl.). __4. As a predicate (Bl., §76, 1): Mat.1:18 9:33, Mrk.2:1, 2 4:26, Rom.4:18 9:20, I Pe 2:15; οὕ ἔχειν (Lat. sic or ita se habere), Act.7:1, al.; ἐκαθέζετο (as he was, without delay or preparation), Jhn.4:6. __5. In comparison, with correlative adv.: καθάπερ . . . οὕ., Rom.12:4, 5 al.; καθὼς . . . οὕ., Luk.11:30, al.; οὕ. . . . καθώς, Luk.24:24, al.; ὡς . . . οὕ., Rom.5:15, al.; οὕ . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, al; ὥσπερ . . . οὕ., Mat.12:40, al.; οὕ. . . . οὕ., 1Co.7:7. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶδον

eidon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1492 원어 검색에서 보기 G1492
Lemma
εἴδω
Strong
G1492
형태소
V-2AAI-1S
품사
동사
알다/보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보다, 알다, 깨닫다' (완료형 οἶδα '알다').

원문 정의 보기

οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, which see), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] pf. with present meaning (plpf. as impf.; on irregular tense-forms, see App.), to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge of: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.25:13, Mrk.10:19, Jhn.10:4, Rom.7:7, al.; with accusative of person(s), Mat.26:72, Jhn.1:31, Act.3:16, al.; τ. θεόν, 1Th.4:5, Tit.1:16, al.; with accusative and inf., Luk.4:41, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:6, Luk.20:21, Jhn.3:2, Rom.2:2 11:2, al.; before quaest. indir., Mat.26:70, Jhn.9:21, Eph.1:18, al.; with inf., to know how (cl.), Mat.7:11, Luk.11:13, Php.4:12, 1Th.4:4, al.; in unique sense of respect, appreciate: 1Th.5:12 (but see also ICC on 1Th.4:4). SYN.: see: γινώσκω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵππους

ippous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2462 원어 검색에서 보기 G2462
Lemma
ἵππος
Strong
G2462
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말(馬)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵππος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for סוּס, sometimes for פָּרָשׁ, רֶכֶב ;] a horse: Jas.3:3, Rev.6:2 ff. Rev.9:7 ff. Rev.14:20 18:13 19:11 ff,† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὁράσει

horasei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3706 원어 검색에서 보기 G3706
Lemma
ὅρασις
Strong
G3706
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
환상/모양
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '봄, 환상; 모양, 외관'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅρασις, -εως, ἡ (ὁράω) [in LXX chiefly for מַרְאֶה, חָזוֹן and cognate forms ;] __1. in Arist. and later writers, the act of seeing, the sense of sight, and by meton., pl., the eyes. __2. appearance (Num.24:4, Eze.1:5, Sir.41:20, al.): Rev.4:3. __3. = ὅραμα, a vision: Act.2:17 (LXX), Rev.9:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καθημένους

kathēmenous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2521 원어 검색에서 보기 G2521
Lemma
κάθημαι
Strong
G2521
형태소
V-PNP-APM
품사
동사
앉다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '앉다, 거하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κάθ-ημαι [in LXX chiefly for יָשַׁב ;] in cl. present and imperfect only (prop. pf. and plpf. of καθέζομαι; cf. Bl., § 24), in LXX and NT fut. also, to sit, be seated: Mat.11:16 22:44" (LXX), Mrk.2:6, Jhn.6:3, Act.2:2, Jas.2:3 (on the vulgar imper. κάθου, see Kennedy, Sources, 162), Rev.4:3, al.; before prep. with accusative, ἐπί, Mat.9:9, Mrk.2:14, Jhn.12:16; παρά, Mat.13:1, Mrk.10:46; περί, Mrk.3:32, 34; πρός, Luk.22:56; ὑπό, Jas.2:3; εἰς, Mrk.13:3; μετά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.26:58; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mat.22:44; ἐπάνω, with genitive, Mat.28:2; ἀπέναντι, with genitive, Mat.27:61; ἐπί, with dative, Act.3:10; id. with genitive, Act.8:28; ἐκεῖ, Mat.15:29; pleonastic (M, Pr., 230, 241; Dalman, Words, 22), Mat.13:2, Act.23:3, Rev.18:7; metaphorically, Mat.4:16, Luk.1:79" (LXX) ; of one's domicile (Neh.11:6, Sir.50:26; Hdt., v, 63), Luk.21:31, Act.2:2, Rev.14:6 (cf. συν-κάθημαι) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπ᾽

ep᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχοντας

echontas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAP-APM
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θώρακας

thōrakas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2382 원어 검색에서 보기 G2382
Lemma
θώραξ
Strong
G2382
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
흉배/갑옷
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '흉배, 가슴 보호 갑옷'.

원문 정의 보기

θώραξ, -ακσς, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for שִׁרְיוֹן and cogn. forms ;] a breastplate: Rev.9:9, 17; θ. τ. δικαιοσύνης, Eph.6:14 (cf. Isa.59:17, Wis.5:18-19); θ. πίστεως, 1Th.5:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πυρίνους

purinous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4447 원어 검색에서 보기 G4447
Lemma
πύρινος
Strong
G4447
형태소
A-APM
품사
형용사
불빛의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '불 같은, 불빛의'.

원문 정의 보기

πύρινος, -η, -ον [in LXX: Eze.28:14, 16 (אֵשׁ), Sir.48:9 * ;] fiery: Rev.9:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑακινθίνους

hu'akinthinous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5191 원어 검색에서 보기 G5191
Lemma
ὑακίνθινος
Strong
G5191
형태소
A-APM
품사
형용사
청옥색의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '짙은 청색의, 청옥색의'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑακίνθινος, -η, -ον (ὑάκινθος), [in LXX for תַּחַשׁ, תְּכֵלֶת ;] of hyacinth, hyacinthine (see: ὑάκινθος), "doubtless meant to describe the blue smoke of a sulphurous flame" (Swete): Rev.9:17 (Hom., Eur., al.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θειώδεις.

theiōdeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2306 원어 검색에서 보기 G2306
Lemma
θειώδης
Strong
G2306
형태소
A-APM
품사
형용사
유황의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '유황의, 유황 같은'.

원문 정의 보기

θειώδης, -ες (θεῖον), of brimstone, sulphureous: Rev.9:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αἱ

hai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κεφαλαὶ

kephalai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2776 원어 검색에서 보기 G2776
Lemma
κεφαλή
Strong
G2776
형태소
N-NPF
품사
명사
머리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '머리, 우두머리'.

원문 정의 보기

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX nearly always for רֹאשׁ ;] the head: Mat.5:35, Mrk.6:24, Rev.1:14 9:7, al. mult.; figuratively, ἄνθρακες ἐπὶ τὴν κ., Rom.12:20 (LXX); αἷμι, Act.18:6; metaphorically, of a husband, with genitive, 1Co.1:13, Eph.5:23; of Christ, 1Co.11:3, Eph.4:15 5:23, Col.1:18 2:10, 19; of things, κ. γωνίας, Mat.21:42 (LXX) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵππων

ippōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2462 원어 검색에서 보기 G2462
Lemma
ἵππος
Strong
G2462
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말(馬)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵππος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for סוּס, sometimes for פָּרָשׁ, רֶכֶב ;] a horse: Jas.3:3, Rev.6:2 ff. Rev.9:7 ff. Rev.14:20 18:13 19:11 ff,† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κεφαλαὶ

kephalai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2776 원어 검색에서 보기 G2776
Lemma
κεφαλή
Strong
G2776
형태소
N-NPF
품사
명사
머리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '머리, 우두머리'.

원문 정의 보기

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX nearly always for רֹאשׁ ;] the head: Mat.5:35, Mrk.6:24, Rev.1:14 9:7, al. mult.; figuratively, ἄνθρακες ἐπὶ τὴν κ., Rom.12:20 (LXX); αἷμι, Act.18:6; metaphorically, of a husband, with genitive, 1Co.1:13, Eph.5:23; of Christ, 1Co.11:3, Eph.4:15 5:23, Col.1:18 2:10, 19; of things, κ. γωνίας, Mat.21:42 (LXX) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λεόντων,

leontōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3023 원어 검색에서 보기 G3023
Lemma
λέων
Strong
G3023
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
사자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사자(獅子)'.

원문 정의 보기

λέων, -οντος, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for אֲרִי, אַרְיֵה, also for כְּפִיר, etc. ;] a lion: Heb.11:33, 1Pe.5:8, Rev.4:7 9:8, 17 10:3 13:2; metaphorically, 2Ti.4:17, Rev.5:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στομάτων

stomatōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4750 원어 검색에서 보기 G4750
Lemma
στόμα
Strong
G4750
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '입'.

원문 정의 보기

στόμα, -τος, τό [in LXX chiefly for פֻּם ;] the mouth: of man, Mat.15:11, Jhn.19:29, Act.11:8, al.; of animals, Mat.17:27, 2Ti.4:17 (fig.), Heb.11:33, Jas.3:3, al.; figuratively, of inanimate things (ποταμοῦ, Hom.), ἤνοιξεν ἡ γῆ τὸ σ., Rev.12:16; σ. μαχαίρας (Heb. חֶרֶב ־פֶּה, Gen.34:26 al.), the edge of the sword, Luk.21:24, Heb.11:34; esp. of the mouth as the organ of speech: opposite to καρδία, Mat.12:34, Rom.10:8, 10; in various phrases (some cl., some resembling Hebrew; cf. Bl., § 40, 9): ἀνοίγειν τ. σ. (see: ἀνοίγω); σ. πρὸς σ. (פֶּה ־אֵל פֶּה Num.12:8; = cl., κατὰ σ., Hdt., al.), face to face, II Jn 12, 3Jn.14; διὰ τοῦ σ. (of the Holy Spirit), Luk.1:70, Act.1:16, al.; ἀπὸ (ἐκ) τοῦ σ. (cf. ἀπὸ σ. εἰπεῖν, Plat., al.), of speaking by word of mouth, Luk.22:71, Act.22:14; δόλος (ψεῦδος) ἐν τ. σ., 1Pe.2:22, Rev.14:5" (LXX) ; metaphorically, ἡ ῥομφαία τοῦ σ., Rev.2:16. By meton., for speech (Soph.): Mat.18:16 (LXX), Luk.19:22 21:15, 2Co.13:1 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκπορεύεται

ekporeuetai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1607 원어 검색에서 보기 G1607
Lemma
ἐκπορεύω
Strong
G1607
형태소
V-PNI-3S
품사
동사
나가다/나오다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나가다, 나오다, 흘러나오다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ-πορεύω [in LXX chiefly for יָצָא ;] to make to go out; pass. and mid., to go forth: Luk.3:7, Act.25:4; of demons leaving one possessed, Mat.17:21 (WH om.), Act.19:12; of excrement, Mk 719; before ἀπό, Mat.20:29, Mrk.10:46; ἐκ, Mrk.13:1 (of the dead rising, Jhn.5:29); ἐκεῖθεν, Mrk.6:11; ἔξω, Mrk.11:19; είς, Mrk.10:17, Jhn.5:29; ἐπί, with accusative of person(s), Rev.16:14; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Mat.3:5, Mrk.1:5; εἰσπορ- (which see) καὶ ἐ., Act.9:28; metaphorically, to come forth, proceed: of feelings, etc., Mrk.7:23; before ἐκ, Mat.15:11, 18 Mrk.7:15, 20-21, Luk.4:22, Eph.4:29; ῥῆμα, before διά, Mat.4:4 (LXX); of lightning and flame, Rev.4:5 9:17-18 11:5; a river, Rev.22:1; a sword, Rev.1:16 19:15; a rumour, before εἰς, Luk.4:37; of the Holy Spirit, before παρά, Jhn.15:26.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πῦρ

pur

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4442 원어 검색에서 보기 G4442
Lemma
πῦρ
Strong
G4442
형태소
N-NSN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '불'.

원문 정의 보기

πῦρ genitive, πυρός, τό, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for אֵשׁ ;] fire: Mrk.9:22, Luk.3:9, Jhn.15:6, Act.2:10, 1Co.3:13, Jas.3:5, Rev.8:5, al; π. καὶ θεῖον, Luk.17:29; κατακαίειν (ἐν) π., Mat.13:40, Rev.17:16 18:8; καίεσθαι πυρί, Heb.12:18, Rev.8:8 21:8; φλὸξ πυρός, Act.7:30, 2Th.1:8, Heb.1:7, Rev.1:14 2:18 19:12; λαμπάδες πυρός, Rev.4:5; στῦλοι πυρός, Rev.10:1; ἄνθρακες πυρός, Rom.12:20 (LXX); γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός, Act.2:3; δοκιμάζειν (πυροῦσθαι) διὰ πυρός, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.3:18; ὡς διὰ. π. (Lft., Notes, 193), 1Co.3:15. Of the fire of hell (cf. Dalman, Words,161): Mrk.9:48 (LXX); τὸ π. τὸ αἰώνιον, Mat.18:8 25:41 (cf. 4Ma.12:12); ἄσβεστον, Mrk.9:43; πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχειν, Ju 7; γέεννα τοῦ π., Mat.5:22 18:9; κάμινος τοῦ π., Mat.13:42, 50; ἡ λίμνη τοῦ π., Rev.19:20 20:10, 14-15; πυρὶ τηρεῖσθαι, 2Pe.3:7; βασανισθῆναι ἐν π., Rev.14:10. Metaphorical: βαπτίζειν πυρί, Luk.3:16; of the tongue, Jas.3:5; of strife and discord, Luk.12:49; ἐκ π. ἁρπάζειν, Ju 23; πυρὶ αλίζεσθαι, Mrk.9:49; ζῆλος πυρός, Heb.10:27; of God, π, καταναλίσκον, Heb.12:29 (LXX) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καπνὸς

kapnos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2586 원어 검색에서 보기 G2586
Lemma
καπνός
Strong
G2586
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
연기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연기'.

원문 정의 보기

καπνός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for עָשָׁן ;] smoke: Rev.8:4 9:2-3, 17-18 14:11 15:8 18:9, 18 19:3; ἀτμὶς καπνοῦ, Act.2:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεῖον.

theion

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2303 원어 검색에서 보기 G2303
Lemma
θεῖον
Strong
G2303
형태소
N-NSN
품사
명사
유황
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '유황'.

원문 정의 보기

θεῖον, -ου, τό [in LXX; Gen.19:24, Deu.29:23 Job.18:15, Psa.11:7, Isa.30:33 34:9, Eze.38:22 (גׇּפְרִית), 3Ma.2:5 * ;] brimstone: Luk.17:29 (LXX), Rev.9:17-18 14:10 19:20 20:10 21:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
이 세 재앙 곧 저희 입에서 나오는 불과 연기와 유황을 인하여 사람 삼분의 일이 죽임을 당하니라

원어

ἀπὸ

apo

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τριῶν

triōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5140 원어 검색에서 보기 G5140
Lemma
τρεῖς
Strong
G5140
형태소
A-GPF
품사
형용사
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '셋, 세 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

τρεῖς, οἱ, αἱ, τρία, τά three: Mat.12:40, al.; μετὰ τ. ἡμέρας = τῇ τρίτῃ ἡ., Mrk.10:34, al. (cf. Field, Notes, 11 ff.) Τρεῖς Ταβέρναι (see: ταβέρνη), Three Taverns (Lit. Tres Tabernae) a halting place on the Appian Way: Act.28:15 (see DB, iv, 690).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πληγῶν

plēgōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4127 원어 검색에서 보기 G4127
Lemma
πληγή
Strong
G4127
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
재앙/상처
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '때림, 상처, 재앙'.

원문 정의 보기

πληγή, ῆς, ἡ (πλήσσω), [in LXX chiefly for מַכָּה, also for מַגֵּפָה etc. ;] __1. a blow, stripe, wound: pl., Luk.10:30 12:48, Act.16:23, 33, 2Co.6:5 11:23; ἡ π. τ. θανάτου (RV, death-stroke), Rev.13:3, 12; τ. μαχαίρας, Rev.13:14. __2. Metaphorical, a calamity, plague: Rev.9:18, 20 11:6 15:1, 6 15:8 16:9, 21 18:4, 8 21:9 22:18.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτων

toutōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-GPF
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπεκτάνθησαν

apektanthēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-API-3P
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τρίτον

triton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5154 원어 검색에서 보기 G5154
Lemma
τρίτος
Strong
G5154
형태소
A-NSN
품사
형용사
셋째
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '셋째의'.

원문 정의 보기

τρίτος, -η, -ον the third: Mat.22:26, Mrk.12:21 15:25, Luk.24:21, Act.2:15, al.; τῇ τ. ἡμέρᾳ (i.e. the next day but one: Xen., al.; see Field, Notes, 11 ff.), Mat.16:21, Luk.24:46, al.; substantively, accusative masc., τρίτον, a third (servant), Luk.20:12; neut., τὸ τ., with genitive, the third part of: Rev.8:7-12 9:15, 18 12:4. As adv., τὸ τ., the third time: Mrk.14:41, Jhn.21:17; anarth., τρίτον, a third time, Luk.23:22, Jhn.21:14, 2Co.12:14 13:1; in enumerations, thirdly, 1Co.12:28; ἐκ τ., a third time, Mat.26:44 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπων,

anthrōpōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πυρὸς

puros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4442 원어 검색에서 보기 G4442
Lemma
πῦρ
Strong
G4442
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '불'.

원문 정의 보기

πῦρ genitive, πυρός, τό, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for אֵשׁ ;] fire: Mrk.9:22, Luk.3:9, Jhn.15:6, Act.2:10, 1Co.3:13, Jas.3:5, Rev.8:5, al; π. καὶ θεῖον, Luk.17:29; κατακαίειν (ἐν) π., Mat.13:40, Rev.17:16 18:8; καίεσθαι πυρί, Heb.12:18, Rev.8:8 21:8; φλὸξ πυρός, Act.7:30, 2Th.1:8, Heb.1:7, Rev.1:14 2:18 19:12; λαμπάδες πυρός, Rev.4:5; στῦλοι πυρός, Rev.10:1; ἄνθρακες πυρός, Rom.12:20 (LXX); γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός, Act.2:3; δοκιμάζειν (πυροῦσθαι) διὰ πυρός, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.3:18; ὡς διὰ. π. (Lft., Notes, 193), 1Co.3:15. Of the fire of hell (cf. Dalman, Words,161): Mrk.9:48 (LXX); τὸ π. τὸ αἰώνιον, Mat.18:8 25:41 (cf. 4Ma.12:12); ἄσβεστον, Mrk.9:43; πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχειν, Ju 7; γέεννα τοῦ π., Mat.5:22 18:9; κάμινος τοῦ π., Mat.13:42, 50; ἡ λίμνη τοῦ π., Rev.19:20 20:10, 14-15; πυρὶ τηρεῖσθαι, 2Pe.3:7; βασανισθῆναι ἐν π., Rev.14:10. Metaphorical: βαπτίζειν πυρί, Luk.3:16; of the tongue, Jas.3:5; of strife and discord, Luk.12:49; ἐκ π. ἁρπάζειν, Ju 23; πυρὶ αλίζεσθαι, Mrk.9:49; ζῆλος πυρός, Heb.10:27; of God, π, καταναλίσκον, Heb.12:29 (LXX) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καπνοῦ

kapnou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2586 원어 검색에서 보기 G2586
Lemma
καπνός
Strong
G2586
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
연기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연기'.

원문 정의 보기

καπνός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for עָשָׁן ;] smoke: Rev.8:4 9:2-3, 17-18 14:11 15:8 18:9, 18 19:3; ἀτμὶς καπνοῦ, Act.2:19 (LXX).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θείου

theiou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2303 원어 검색에서 보기 G2303
Lemma
θεῖον
Strong
G2303
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
유황
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '유황'.

원문 정의 보기

θεῖον, -ου, τό [in LXX; Gen.19:24, Deu.29:23 Job.18:15, Psa.11:7, Isa.30:33 34:9, Eze.38:22 (גׇּפְרִית), 3Ma.2:5 * ;] brimstone: Luk.17:29 (LXX), Rev.9:17-18 14:10 19:20 20:10 21:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκπορευομένου

ekporeuomenou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1607 원어 검색에서 보기 G1607
Lemma
ἐκπορεύω
Strong
G1607
형태소
V-PNP-GSN
품사
동사
나가다/나오다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나가다, 나오다, 흘러나오다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ-πορεύω [in LXX chiefly for יָצָא ;] to make to go out; pass. and mid., to go forth: Luk.3:7, Act.25:4; of demons leaving one possessed, Mat.17:21 (WH om.), Act.19:12; of excrement, Mk 719; before ἀπό, Mat.20:29, Mrk.10:46; ἐκ, Mrk.13:1 (of the dead rising, Jhn.5:29); ἐκεῖθεν, Mrk.6:11; ἔξω, Mrk.11:19; είς, Mrk.10:17, Jhn.5:29; ἐπί, with accusative of person(s), Rev.16:14; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Mat.3:5, Mrk.1:5; εἰσπορ- (which see) καὶ ἐ., Act.9:28; metaphorically, to come forth, proceed: of feelings, etc., Mrk.7:23; before ἐκ, Mat.15:11, 18 Mrk.7:15, 20-21, Luk.4:22, Eph.4:29; ῥῆμα, before διά, Mat.4:4 (LXX); of lightning and flame, Rev.4:5 9:17-18 11:5; a river, Rev.22:1; a sword, Rev.1:16 19:15; a rumour, before εἰς, Luk.4:37; of the Holy Spirit, before παρά, Jhn.15:26.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στομάτων

stomatōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4750 원어 검색에서 보기 G4750
Lemma
στόμα
Strong
G4750
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '입'.

원문 정의 보기

στόμα, -τος, τό [in LXX chiefly for פֻּם ;] the mouth: of man, Mat.15:11, Jhn.19:29, Act.11:8, al.; of animals, Mat.17:27, 2Ti.4:17 (fig.), Heb.11:33, Jas.3:3, al.; figuratively, of inanimate things (ποταμοῦ, Hom.), ἤνοιξεν ἡ γῆ τὸ σ., Rev.12:16; σ. μαχαίρας (Heb. חֶרֶב ־פֶּה, Gen.34:26 al.), the edge of the sword, Luk.21:24, Heb.11:34; esp. of the mouth as the organ of speech: opposite to καρδία, Mat.12:34, Rom.10:8, 10; in various phrases (some cl., some resembling Hebrew; cf. Bl., § 40, 9): ἀνοίγειν τ. σ. (see: ἀνοίγω); σ. πρὸς σ. (פֶּה ־אֵל פֶּה Num.12:8; = cl., κατὰ σ., Hdt., al.), face to face, II Jn 12, 3Jn.14; διὰ τοῦ σ. (of the Holy Spirit), Luk.1:70, Act.1:16, al.; ἀπὸ (ἐκ) τοῦ σ. (cf. ἀπὸ σ. εἰπεῖν, Plat., al.), of speaking by word of mouth, Luk.22:71, Act.22:14; δόλος (ψεῦδος) ἐν τ. σ., 1Pe.2:22, Rev.14:5" (LXX) ; metaphorically, ἡ ῥομφαία τοῦ σ., Rev.2:16. By meton., for speech (Soph.): Mat.18:16 (LXX), Luk.19:22 21:15, 2Co.13:1 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν.

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
이 말들의 힘은 그 입과 그 꼬리에 있으니 그 꼬리는 뱀 같고 또 꼬리에 머리가 있어 이것으로 해하더라

원어

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξουσία

exousia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1849 원어 검색에서 보기 G1849
Lemma
ἐξουσία
Strong
G1849
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
권세/권위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '권세, 권위, 자유'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐξουσία, -ας, ἡ (ἔξεστι), [in LXX: 4Ki.20:13, Psa.113 (114):2 135 (136)8, 9, Isa.39:2, Jer.28 (51):28 (מֶמְשָׁלָה), frequently in Da for Aram. שָׁלְטָן, etc., Wis.10:14, Sir.9:13, al. ;] __1. prop., liberty or power to act, freedom to exercise the inward force or faculty expressed by δύναμις (which see): 1Co.9:12; ἐ. ἔχειν, 2Th.3:9; id. before inf., Jhn.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5; with genitive obj., Rom.9:21; before ἐπί, with accusative, Rev.22:14; περί, 1Co.7:37. __2. Later (cf. Milligan, Th., 114; MM, Exp., xiv), of the power of right, authority: Mat.21:33, Mrk.11:28, Luk.20:2; of Messianic authority, Mat.9:6, Mrk.2:10, al.; of apostolic authority, 2Co.10:8 13:10; of the authority of government: Mat.8:9 28:18, Ju 25, Rev.12:10, al.; esp. of judicial authority, Luk.20:20, Jhn.19:10, 11. __3. Meton., __(a) jurisdiction: Luk.23:7 (cf. 1Ma.6:11, Isa.39:2); __(b) a ruler or magistrate: Rom.13:1-3; pl., Luk.12:11, Rom.13:1, Tit.3:1; __(with) of supramundane powers (syn. with ἀρχή, δύναμις, θρόνος, κυριότης): 1Co.15:24, Eph.1:21 3:10, Col.2:10, 1Pe.3:22, al. (Cremer. 236). SYN.: see: δύναμις. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵππων

ippōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2462 원어 검색에서 보기 G2462
Lemma
ἵππος
Strong
G2462
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말(馬)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵππος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for סוּס, sometimes for פָּרָשׁ, רֶכֶב ;] a horse: Jas.3:3, Rev.6:2 ff. Rev.9:7 ff. Rev.14:20 18:13 19:11 ff,† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στόματι

stomati

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4750 원어 검색에서 보기 G4750
Lemma
στόμα
Strong
G4750
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '입'.

원문 정의 보기

στόμα, -τος, τό [in LXX chiefly for פֻּם ;] the mouth: of man, Mat.15:11, Jhn.19:29, Act.11:8, al.; of animals, Mat.17:27, 2Ti.4:17 (fig.), Heb.11:33, Jas.3:3, al.; figuratively, of inanimate things (ποταμοῦ, Hom.), ἤνοιξεν ἡ γῆ τὸ σ., Rev.12:16; σ. μαχαίρας (Heb. חֶרֶב ־פֶּה, Gen.34:26 al.), the edge of the sword, Luk.21:24, Heb.11:34; esp. of the mouth as the organ of speech: opposite to καρδία, Mat.12:34, Rom.10:8, 10; in various phrases (some cl., some resembling Hebrew; cf. Bl., § 40, 9): ἀνοίγειν τ. σ. (see: ἀνοίγω); σ. πρὸς σ. (פֶּה ־אֵל פֶּה Num.12:8; = cl., κατὰ σ., Hdt., al.), face to face, II Jn 12, 3Jn.14; διὰ τοῦ σ. (of the Holy Spirit), Luk.1:70, Act.1:16, al.; ἀπὸ (ἐκ) τοῦ σ. (cf. ἀπὸ σ. εἰπεῖν, Plat., al.), of speaking by word of mouth, Luk.22:71, Act.22:14; δόλος (ψεῦδος) ἐν τ. σ., 1Pe.2:22, Rev.14:5" (LXX) ; metaphorically, ἡ ῥομφαία τοῦ σ., Rev.2:16. By meton., for speech (Soph.): Mat.18:16 (LXX), Luk.19:22 21:15, 2Co.13:1 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῖς

tais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐραῖς

ourais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3769 원어 검색에서 보기 G3769
Lemma
οὐρά
Strong
G3769
형태소
N-DPF
품사
명사
꼬리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '꼬리'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐρά, -ᾶς, ἡ [in LXX for זָנָב ;] a tail: Rev.9:10, 19 12:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν.

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αἱ

hai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐραὶ

ourai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3769 원어 검색에서 보기 G3769
Lemma
οὐρά
Strong
G3769
형태소
N-NPF
품사
명사
꼬리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '꼬리'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐρά, -ᾶς, ἡ [in LXX for זָנָב ;] a tail: Rev.9:10, 19 12:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅμοιαι

homoiai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3664 원어 검색에서 보기 G3664
Lemma
ὅμοιος
Strong
G3664
형태소
A-NPF
품사
형용사
같은/비슷한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '같은, 비슷한'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅμοιος, -οία, -οιον [in LXX for כְּמוֹ, etc. ;] like, resembling, such as, the same as: with dative, of form or appearance, Jhn.9:9, Rev.1:13 (WH, mg., R, but see infr.) Rev.1:15 2:18 4:6-7 9:7, 10 (B1., § 37, 62) Rev_9:19; Rev_11:1; Rev_13:2; Rev_13:11; ὁράσει, Rev_4:3; of nature, condition, ability, etc., Mat_22:39, Act_17:29, Gal_5:21, 1Jn_3:2, Rev_13:4; Rev_18:18; Rev_21:11; Rev_21:18; of comparison in parables, Mat_13:31 ff. Mat_20:1, Luk_13:18-19; Luk_13:21; of thinking, acting, etc., Mat_11:16; Mat_13:52, Luk_6:47-49; Luk_7:31-32 (T, with genitive; 131., § 36, 11) Luk_12:36, Joh_8:55, Jud_1:7; with accusative, Rev_1:13 (WH, txt.; Swete, Hort, in l) Rev_14:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄφεσιν

ophesin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3789 원어 검색에서 보기 G3789
Lemma
ὄφις
Strong
G3789
형태소
N-DPM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '뱀'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄφις, -εως, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for נָחָשׁ ;] a serpent, snake: Mat.7:10 Mrk.16:18, Luk.10:19 11:11, Jhn.3:14, 1Co.10:9, Rev.9:19; as typical of wisdom and cunning, Mat.10:16 23:23, 2Co.11:3 (cf. Gen.31:1-55); of Satan (cf. Gen.3:1, Wis.2:23-24, 4Ma.18:8), Rev.12:9, 14 12:11 20:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχουσαι

echousai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAP-NPF
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κεφαλὰς

kephalas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2776 원어 검색에서 보기 G2776
Lemma
κεφαλή
Strong
G2776
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
머리
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '머리, 우두머리'.

원문 정의 보기

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX nearly always for רֹאשׁ ;] the head: Mat.5:35, Mrk.6:24, Rev.1:14 9:7, al. mult.; figuratively, ἄνθρακες ἐπὶ τὴν κ., Rom.12:20 (LXX); αἷμι, Act.18:6; metaphorically, of a husband, with genitive, 1Co.1:13, Eph.5:23; of Christ, 1Co.11:3, Eph.4:15 5:23, Col.1:18 2:10, 19; of things, κ. γωνίας, Mat.21:42 (LXX) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐταῖς

autais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPF
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδικοῦσιν.

adikousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G91 원어 검색에서 보기 G91
Lemma
ἀδικέω
Strong
G91
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
해하다/불의를 행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '해를 끼치다, 불의를 행하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδικέω, -ῶ (ἄδικος), [in LXX for עשׁק, עוה, etc. ;] __1. intrans., to be ἄδικος, do wrong, act wickedly or criminally: Act.25:11, 1Co.6:8, 2Co.7:12, Col.3:25, Rev.22:11; to do hurt, Rev.9:19. __2. Trans. __(a) to do some wrong: ὃ ἠδίκησεν, Col.3:25; to wrong some one, Mat.20:13, Act.7:26, 27 25:10, 2Co.7:2, Gal.4:12, Phm 18, 2Pe.2:13; pass., Act.7:24, 2Co.7:12; mid., 1Co.6:7 (suffer . . . to be wronged; WM, §38, 3; but see Bl., §54, 5; and cf. ἀποστερέω); __(b) to injure, hurt: Luk.10:19 Rev.2:11 6:6 7:2, 3 9:4,10 11:5. † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
이 재앙에 죽지 않고 남은 사람들은 그 손으로 행하는 일을 회개치 아니하고 오히려 여러 귀신과 또는 보거나 듣거나 다니거나 하지 못하는 금, 은, 동과 목석의 우상에게 절하고

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λοιποὶ

loipoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3062 원어 검색에서 보기 G3062
Lemma
λοιπός
Strong
G3062
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
남은/그 밖의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '남은, 나머지의'; 부사로 '이제'.

원문 정의 보기

λοιπός, -ή, -όν (λείπω), [in LXX chiefly for יָתַר, also for שְׁאָר, etc. ;] the remaining, the rest, __1. pl., οἱ λ.: with subst., Mat.25:11, Act.2:37, Rom.1:13, al.; absol., Mat.22:6, Mrk.16:13, Luk.24:10, al.; οἱ λ. οἱ (B1., § 47, 8), Act.28:9, 1Th.4:13, Rev.2:24; οἱ λ. τ. ἀνθρώπων (LS, see word, ad. init.), Rev.9:20; τὰ λ., Mrk.4:19, Rev.3:2, al. __2. Neut. sing. (accusative ref.), adverbially, τὸ λ.; __(a) for the future, henceforth: Mrk.14:41, 1Co.7:29 (Lft., Notes, 232 f.), Heb.10:13; anarth. (Deiss., LAE, 17616, 1885, 20), Act.27:20, 2Ti.4:8; τοῦ λ. (sc. χρόνου; LS, see word; M, Pr., 73; Bl., § 36, 13), Gal.6:17, Eph.6:10; __(b) besides, moreover, for the rest: Php.3:1 4:8; anarth., 1Co.1:16 4:2, 1Th.4:1 (M, Th., in l; Lft., Notes, 51) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπων,

anthrōpōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἳ

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-NPM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπεκτάνθησαν

apektanthēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-API-3P
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῖς

tais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πληγαῖς

plēgais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4127 원어 검색에서 보기 G4127
Lemma
πληγή
Strong
G4127
형태소
N-DPF
품사
명사
재앙/상처
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '때림, 상처, 재앙'.

원문 정의 보기

πληγή, ῆς, ἡ (πλήσσω), [in LXX chiefly for מַכָּה, also for מַגֵּפָה etc. ;] __1. a blow, stripe, wound: pl., Luk.10:30 12:48, Act.16:23, 33, 2Co.6:5 11:23; ἡ π. τ. θανάτου (RV, death-stroke), Rev.13:3, 12; τ. μαχαίρας, Rev.13:14. __2. Metaphorical, a calamity, plague: Rev.9:18, 20 11:6 15:1, 6 15:8 16:9, 21 18:4, 8 21:9 22:18.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταύταις,

tautais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-DPF
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδὲ

oude

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3761 원어 검색에서 보기 G3761
Lemma
οὐδέ
Strong
G3761
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다, 또한 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή. __I. As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mat.6:15, Luk.16:31, Rom.4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mat.5:15 10:24, Mrk.4:22, Luk.6:43, 44, Jhn.6:24, Act.2:27, Rom.2:28, al. (see Bl., §77, 10). __II. As adv., not even: Mat.6:29, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:9, 1Co.5:1; οὐδὲ εἷς, Act.4:32, Rom.3:10" (LXX) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετενόησαν

metenoēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3340 원어 검색에서 보기 G3340
Lemma
μετανοέω
Strong
G3340
형태소
V-AAI-3P
품사
동사
회개하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '회개하다, 마음을 바꾸다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-νοέω, -ῶ [in LXX for נָחַם ni., 1Ki.15:29, Jer.4:28, al. ;] to change one's mind or purpose, hence, to repent; in NT (exc. Luk.17:3-4), of repentance from sin, involving amendment: before ἀπό, Act.8:22; ἔκ, Rev.2:21-22 9:20-21 16:11 (מִן שׁוּב); ἐπί, 2Co.12:21; absol., Mat.3:2 4:17 11:20 12:41, Mrk.1:15 6:12, Luk.11:32 13:3, 5 15:7, 10 16:30 17:3-4, Act.2:38 3:19 17:30 26:20 2:5, 16 2:21 3:3, 19; with inf., Rev.16:9; ἐν σάκκῳ κ. σποδῷ, Mat.11:21, Luk.10:13.† SYN.: μεταμέλομαι, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔργων

ergōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2041 원어 검색에서 보기 G2041
Lemma
ἔργον
Strong
G2041
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
일/행위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '일, 행위, 업적'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔργον, -ου, τό (originally Ϝέργον, work), [very frequently in LXX, chiefly for מַשֶׂה, מְלָאכָה, also for עֲבֹדָה, פֹּעַל, etc. ;] __1. work, task, employment: Mrk.13:34, Jhn.4:34 17:4, Act.13:2, Php.1:22 2:30, 1Th.5:13, al.; of an enterprise or undertaking (Deu.15:10, Wis.2:12), Act.5:38. __2. a deed, action: Tit.1:16, Jas.1:25 . listing, from λόγος, Luk.24:19, Rom.15:18, 2Th.2:17, 1Jn.3:18; ἐν λόγοις κ. ἔ., Act.7:22; of acts of God, Jhn.9:3, Act.13:41" (LXX), Heb.4:10, Rev.15:3; of Christ, Mat.11:2; esp. in Jo, e.g. 5:20, 36 7:3 10:38 14:11, 12 15:24; in ethical sense, of human actions (AR, Eph., 190), bad or good, Mat.23:3, Luk.11:48, Jhn.3:20, 21 Jas.2:14ff. 3:13, Rev.2:5 3:8; τὸ ἔ., collectively, Gal.6:4, Jas.1:4, 1Pe.1:17, Rev.22:12; τὸ ἔ. τ. νόμου, Rom.2:15; ἔ. ἀγαθόν, Rom.2:7, Col.1:10, 2Th.2:17, Tit.1:16, al.; καλόν, Mat.26:10, Mrk.14:6; pl. (as frequently in cl.), Mat.5:16, 1Ti.5:10, 25 Heb.10:24; ἔ. πίστεως, 1Th.1:3, 2Th.1:11; ἔ. πονηρά, Col.1:21, 2Jo.11; νέκρα, Heb.6:1 9:14; ἄκαρπα, Eph.5:11; ἔ. ἀσεβείας, Ju 15; τ. σκότους, Rom.13:12, Eph.5:11; ἔ. νόμου, Rom.3:20, 28 Gal.2:16 3:2, 5 10. __3. that which is wrought or made, a work: 1Co.3:13-15; τ. χειρῶν, Act.7:41; of the works of God, Heb.1:10; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔ., 2Pe.3:10; τὸ ἔ. τ. θεοῦ, Rom.14:20. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χειρῶν

cheirōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5495 원어 검색에서 보기 G5495
Lemma
χείρ
Strong
G5495
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '손'.

원문 정의 보기

χείρ, genitive, χειρος (accusative, χεῖραν, 1Pe.5:6 T), ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for יָד ;] the hand: Mat.3:12, Mrk.3:1, Luk.6:6, al. mult.; ἡ χ., acting subject, Luk.22:21; pl., Act.17:25 20:34, 1Jn.1:1; τ. ἔργα τῶν χ., Act.7:41, Rev.9:20; ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τ. ἐμῇ χ., 1Co.16:21, Col.4:18, 2Th.3:17; prepositional phrases, esp. those without art., similar to Heb. constructions (Bl., §32, 4; 40, 9; 46, 9), ἐν χ.; with genitive (Lft., in l.), Gal.3:19; σὺν χ. ἀγγέλου, Act.7:35; διὰ (τῶν) χειρῶν (διὰ χειρός), Mrk.6:2, Act.5:12 7:25, al.; ἐπὶ χειρῶν, Mat.4:6, Luk.4:11; ellipse of χ. (ἡ δεξία, ἀριστερα; Bl., §44, 1), Mat.6:3, al. By meton., for the power or activity of an individual, Mat.17:22, Mrk.9:31, Luk.9:31, Jhn.10:39, Act.12:11, al.; metaphorically, of the activity or power of God: Luk.1:66 23:46, Jhn.10:29, Act.11:21 13:11, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν,

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προσκυνήσουσιν

proskunēsousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4352 원어 검색에서 보기 G4352
Lemma
προσκυνέω
Strong
G4352
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
경배하다/절하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '경배하다, 절하다, 예배하다'.

원문 정의 보기

προσ-κυνέω, -ῶ (κυνέω, to kiss), [in LXX chiefly for שָׁחָה hith. ;] to make obeisance, do reverence to, worship; __(a) prop. (as in cl., of the gods: Hdt., Æsch., Plat., al.), of God, Christ and supra-mundane beings: absol., Jhn.4:20 12:20, Act.8:27 24:11, Heb.11:21 (Westc., in l), Rev.11:1; πίπτειν καὶ π., Rev.5:14; with dative (of the significance of this constr. as com­pared with the usual cl., with accusative, see Abbott, JG, 78 f.; JV, 133 ff.), Jhn.4:21, 23, Act.7:43, 1Co.14:25, Heb.1:6, Rev.4:10 7:11 11:16 13:4, 15 14:7 16:2 19:4, 10 19:20 22:8-9; with accusative (see supr.), Mat.4:10, Luk.4:8 24:52 (WH, R, mg., om.), Jhn.4:22, 24, Rev.9:20 13:4, 8 13:12 14:9, 11 20:4; Seq. ἐπώπιον, Luk.4:7, Rev.15:4; __(b) as in cl., of homage to human superiors (cf. MM, xxi): absol., Mat.20:20, Act.10:25; with dative (see supr.), Mat.2:2, 8 8:2 9:18 14:33 15:25 18:26 28:9, Mrk.15:19, Jhn.9:38; πεσὼν., Mat.2:11 4:9; ἐνώπιον τ. ποδῶν, Rev.3:9; with accusative, Mrk.5:6 (dative T).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δαιμόνια

daimonia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1140 원어 검색에서 보기 G1140
Lemma
δαιμόνιον
Strong
G1140
형태소
N-APN
품사
명사
귀신/악령
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '귀신, 악령'.

원문 정의 보기

δαιμόνιον, -ου, τό (neut. of δαιμόνιος, -α, -ον, divine), [in LXX (so also in π; see MM, Exp., x) for שֵׁד, אֱלִיל, (frequently in To) ;] __1. as in cl.; __(a) the Divine power, Deity (Hdt., Plat., al.); __(b) an inferior divinity, deity or demon (as in magical π, Deiss., BS, 281; MM, Exp., x): ξένα δ., Act.17:18. __2. (a) in OT, heathen deities, false gods (e.g. Deu.32:17, Psa.95 (96):5); __(b) in NT, evil spirits, demons: θύουσιν δαιμονίοις, 1Co.10:20; διδασκαλίαι δαιμονίων, 1Ti.4:1; προσκυνεῖν τὰ δ., Rev.9:20; ἄρχων τῶν δ., Mat.9:34; especially (syn. with πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον) as operating upon and "possessing" (of. δαιμονίζομαι) men: Mat.11:18, and al.; εἰσέρχεσθαι δ. εἰς. . ., Luk.8:30; δ. ἔχειν, Luk.4:33; δ. ἐκβάλλειν, Mat.7:22 In the phrase πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Luk.4:33, the wider cl. usage (1. b) is recognised, ἀκ. being elsewhere in NT, the epithet of πν., and δ. = πν. ἀκ. (see ICC, in l; Cremer, 168) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἴδωλα

eidōla

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1497 원어 검색에서 보기 G1497
Lemma
εἴδωλον
Strong
G1497
형태소
N-APN
품사
명사
우상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '우상, 형상'.

원문 정의 보기

εἴδωλον, -ου, τό (εἶδος), [in LXX for אֱלוֹהָּ, גְּלוּלִים, etc. ;] __1. in cl. __(a) a phantom, image, likeness; __(b) an image in the mind, an idea, fancy. __2. In LXX and NT, __(a) an image of a god, an idol (cf. Polyb., xxxi, 3, 13): Act.7:41, 1Co.12:2, Rev.9:20; __(b) the false god or idol worshipped in an image (ICC, on I Th, l.with): Act.15:20, Rom.2:22, 1Co.8:4, 7 10:19 2Co.6:18, 1Th.1:9, 1Jn.5:21.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χρυσᾶ

chrusa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5552 원어 검색에서 보기 G5552
Lemma
χρύσεος
Strong
G5552
형태소
A-APN
품사
형용사
금의/금으로 된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '금의, 금으로 만든'.

원문 정의 보기

Χρύσεος, -εα, -εον (-οῦς, -ῆ, -οῦν; on accusative sing. fem., -ᾶν, Rev.1:13 and genitive pl. uncontr., -εων, Rev.2:1, LTr., see M, Pr., 48 and cf. Thackeray, Gr., x, 172 f.) (χρυσός), [in LXX chiefly for זָהָב ;] golden, i.e. made or overlaid with gold: 2Ti.2:20, Heb.9:4, Rev.1:12-13, 20 2:1 4:4 5:8 8:3 9:13, 20 14:14 15:6-7 17:4 21:15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀργυρᾶ

argura

원어 사전 정의 보기 G693 원어 검색에서 보기 G693
Lemma
ἀργύρεος
Strong
G693
형태소
A-APN
품사
형용사
은의/은으로 된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '은의, 은으로 만든'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀργύρεος (see MM, see word), -οῦς, -ᾶ, -οῦν (ἄργυρος), [in LXX for כֶּסֶף ;] of silver: Act.19:24 (WH, br.), 2Ti.2:20, Rev.9:20.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χαλκᾶ

chalka

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5470 원어 검색에서 보기 G5470
Lemma
χάλκεος
Strong
G5470
형태소
A-APN
품사
형용사
놋쇠의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '놋쇠의, 청동의'.

원문 정의 보기

χάλκεος, -έα, -εον (-οῦς, -ῆ, -οῦν) (χαλκός), [in LXX chiefly for נְחֹשֶׁת ;] brazen (i.e. of copper): Rev.9:20.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λίθινα

lithina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3035 원어 검색에서 보기 G3035
Lemma
λίθινος
Strong
G3035
형태소
A-APN
품사
형용사
돌의/돌로 된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '돌의, 돌로 만든'.

원문 정의 보기

λίθινος, -η, -ον (λίθος) [in LXX for אֶבֶן ;] of stone: Jhn.2:6, 2Co.3:3, Rev.9:20.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ξύλινα,

xulina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3585 원어 검색에서 보기 G3585
Lemma
ξύλινος
Strong
G3585
형태소
A-APN
품사
형용사
나무로 된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '나무로 만든, 목재의'.

원문 정의 보기

ξύλινος, -η, -ον (ξύλον) [in LXX chiefly for עֵץ ;] wooden: 2Ti.2:20, Heb.9:20 (cf. Ep. Jer.4:1-31 ff).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ha

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-NPN
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βλέπειν

blepein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G991 원어 검색에서 보기 G991
Lemma
βλέπω
Strong
G991
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보다, 바라보다, 주의하다'.

원문 정의 보기

βλέπω, [in LXX chiefly for ראה, also for פּנה, etc. ;] __1. of bodily sight; __(a) to see, have sight (opposite to τυφλὸς): Mat.12:22, Jhn.9:7, Act.9:9, Rom.11:8, Rev.3:18, al.; __(b) to perceive, look (at), see: absol., Act.1:9; with accusative, Mat.7:3, Mrk.5:31, Luk.6:41, Jhn.1:29, al.; ὅραμα, Act.12:9; γυναῖκα, Mat.5:28; βιβλίον, Rev.5:3, 4; τ. βλεπόμενα, 2Co.4:18. __2. Metaphorical, of mental vision; __(a) to see, perceive, discern: absol., Mat.13:13, Luk.8:10; δι ̓ ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; with accusative, Heb.2:9 10:25; before ὅτι, Heb.3:19, Jas.2:22; __(b) to consider, look to, take heed: absol., Mrk.13:23, 33; with accusative, 1Co.1:26, al.; before πῶς, with indic., Luk.8:18, 1Co.3:10, Eph.5:15; before τί, with indic., Mrk.4:24; before εἰς πρόσωπον, of partiality, Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14. Colloq. (for ex. from π., V. Deiss., LAE, 122; M, Pr., 107; MM, Exp., x; Milligan, NTD, 50), β. ἑαυτόν: Mrk.13:9; before ἵνα μή, II Jo 8; β. ἀπό, Mrk.8:15 12:38; before μή (cl. ὁρᾶν), with fut. indic., Col.2:8, Heb.3:12; id. with aor. subj., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5. __3. Of situation and direction (Lat. specto), to look, face (towards), places, etc. (before πρός, Xen, Hell., vii, 1, 17; Eze.40:23, 24): before κατά, with accusative, Act.27:12 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐμ-, ἐπι-, περ-, προ-βλέπω), see DCG, i, 446; ii, 596. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δύνανται

dunantai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-PNI-3P
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκούειν

akouein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περιπατεῖν,

peripatein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4043 원어 검색에서 보기 G4043
Lemma
περιπατέω
Strong
G4043
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
걷다/행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '걷다, 다니다, 행하다(살다)'.

원문 정의 보기

περι-πατέω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for הָלַךְ pi., hith. ;] to walk: absol., Mat.9:5, Mrk.5:42, Luk.5:23, Jhn.1:36; with pred., γυμνός, Rev.16:15; ἐπάνω Luk.11:44; διά, with genitive, Rev.21:24; ἐν, Mrk.11:27 12:38, Jhn.7:1 11:54, Rev.2:1, al.; ἐν τ. σκοτίᾳ, figuratively, Jhn.8:12 12:35, 1Jn.1:6-7 Jn 2:11; ἐπί, with genitive, Mat.14:26; id. with dative, Mat.14:25, 29; μετά, Jhn.6:66, Rev.3:4; παρά, with accusative, Mat.4:18. Metaphorical, of living, passing one's life, conducting oneself (like ἀναστρέφομαι in Xen., Plut., LXX, π.; M, Pro.11:1-31; Deiss., BS, 194) : ἀκριβῶς, Eph.5:15; ἀτάκτως, 2Th.3:6 3:11; εὐσχημόνως, Rev.13:13, 1Th.4:12; ἀξίως, with genitive, Eph.4:1, Col.1:10, 1Th.2:12; καθώς (ὥς), Eph.4:17 5:8, 15, Php.3:17, 1Th.4:1; οὕτως ὥς, 1Co.7:17; before nom. qual., Php.3:18; with dative, Act.21:21, Rom.13:13, 2Co.12:18, Gal.5:16; before ἐν, Rom.6:4, 2Co.4:2 5:7 10:3, Eph.2:2, 10 4:17 5:2, Col.3:7 4:5, Heb.13:9, 2Jn.4 Jn 6, al.; ἐν Χριστῷ, Col.2:6; κατά, with accusative, Mrk.7:5, Rom.8:4 14:15, 1Co.3:3, 2Co.10:2, 2Jn.6 (cf. ἐν-περιπατέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
또 그 살인과 복술과 음행과 도적질을 회개치 아니하더라

원어

καὶ

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετενόησαν

metenoēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3340 원어 검색에서 보기 G3340
Lemma
μετανοέω
Strong
G3340
형태소
V-AAI-3P
품사
동사
회개하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '회개하다, 마음을 바꾸다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-νοέω, -ῶ [in LXX for נָחַם ni., 1Ki.15:29, Jer.4:28, al. ;] to change one's mind or purpose, hence, to repent; in NT (exc. Luk.17:3-4), of repentance from sin, involving amendment: before ἀπό, Act.8:22; ἔκ, Rev.2:21-22 9:20-21 16:11 (מִן שׁוּב); ἐπί, 2Co.12:21; absol., Mat.3:2 4:17 11:20 12:41, Mrk.1:15 6:12, Luk.11:32 13:3, 5 15:7, 10 16:30 17:3-4, Act.2:38 3:19 17:30 26:20 2:5, 16 2:21 3:3, 19; with inf., Rev.16:9; ἐν σάκκῳ κ. σποδῷ, Mat.11:21, Luk.10:13.† SYN.: μεταμέλομαι, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φόνων

phonōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5408 원어 검색에서 보기 G5408
Lemma
φόνος
Strong
G5408
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
살인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '살인, 죽임'.

원문 정의 보기

φόνος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX for דָּם, פֶּה, etc. ;] murder, slaughter: Mrk.15:7, Luk.23:19, 25, Act.9:1, Rom.1:29; φ. μαχαίρης (cf. Exo.17:13, al.), Heb.11:37; pl., Mat.15:19, Mrk.7:21, Rev.9:21.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φαρμάκων

pharmakōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5333 원어 검색에서 보기 G5333
Lemma
φάρμακος
Strong
G5333
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
점술가/술객
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '술객, 마술사, 점쟁이'.

원문 정의 보기

φαρμακός, -ή, -όν [in LXX for כָּשַׁף, etc. ;] devoted to magical arts. As subst., ὁ φ. = φαρμακεύς, a magician, sorcerer: Rev.21:8 22:15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πορνείας

porneias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4202 원어 검색에서 보기 G4202
Lemma
πορνεία
Strong
G4202
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
음행
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '음행, 성적 부도덕'.

원문 정의 보기

πορνεία, -ας, ἡ (πορνεύω), [in LXX for תַּזְנוּת and cogn. forms ;] fornication: Act.15:20, 29 21:25, 1Co.5:1 6:13 6:18, 2Co.12:21, Gal.5:19, Eph.5:3, Col.3:5, 1Th.4:3 (Lft., Notes, 53), Rev.9:21; pl. (see WM, 220; Bl., § 32, 6), 1Co.7:2; disting. from μοιχεία, Mat.15:19, Mrk.7:21; = μοιχεία (Amos 8:17 Sir.23:23, al.), Mat.5:32 19:9. Metaphorical (of idolatry: Deu.23:2, Hos.1:2): Jhn.8:41 (Westc., in l), and so perh. (Thayer-Grimm, see word; but see Swete, in 11.), Rev.2:21 14:18 17:2, 4 18:3 19:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κλεμμάτων

klemmatōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2809 원어 검색에서 보기 G2809
Lemma
κλέμμα
Strong
G2809
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
도둑질
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '도둑질, 절도, 훔침'(계 9장).

원문 정의 보기

κλέμμα, -τος, τό (κλέπτω), [in LXX: Gen.31:39, Exo.22:3-4 (2-3) (גָּנַב, גְּנֵבָה)* ;] __1. a thing stolen (Arist., LXX) __2. = κλοπή, theft (Plato, al.): pl., Rev.9:21.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν.¶

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

이 장의 주석

해설, 라벨, 범위 설명, 음성 강의처럼 본문 흐름에 붙은 주석을 모아 봅니다.

공개 주석

선택한 주석 세트에 이 장의 구조 주석이 없습니다.

질문과 답변

이 장을 읽으며 남긴 질문, 코멘트, 작성자 답변입니다.

기본 주석

로그인 후 질문이나 코멘트를 남길 수 있습니다.

아직 등록된 질문이나 코멘트가 없습니다.